JP2019072105A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving game amusement by creating a change in a mode of performance.SOLUTION: A pachinko game machine includes first display means capable of performing a display on a game; second display means which is more difficult to be recognized than the first display means; display control means for executing control to cause the first display means and the second display means to perform displays; and sound output means capable of outputting a sound; and sound control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means. The display control means executes a first specific performance for displaying a sequel display after a first prequel display is performed, in the first display means, and a second specific performance for displaying a sequel display after a second prequel display, which is a prequel display, is performed, in the second display means. The sound control means does not output a specific sound in the first prequel performance when the first specific performance is executed, and outputs a specific sound in the second prequel performance when the second specific performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21-6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There are gaming machines provided with an image display device (main liquid crystal) and a sub image display device (sub liquid crystal) as the game machines on which effect display is performed, and performing effect display similar to the image display device and sub image display device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-117576, A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above, when performing these similar effect displays, the mode is different only in the display position, regardless of whether the image display device or the sub image display device is executed. Because it is common, the effect was monotonous.

  Therefore, the problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the game by changing the mode of the effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention has a first display means (for example, the main liquid crystal 5 etc.) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, the second display means) more difficult to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal (57SH51 etc.), and the pachinko
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that performs control to cause the first display unit and the second display unit to perform display related to a game;
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
Sound control means (for example, voice control board 13 etc.) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means;
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect for displaying contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after displaying the treasure box 57SH10) after displaying the former stage after displaying the latter stage.
As the specific effect,
In the main liquid crystal 5, a first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)) is displayed after the first-stage display, which is the first-stage display, is performed by the first display means after the second-stage display. After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-4 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 which are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened;
A second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the second liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the second stage display after performing the second stage display, which is the first stage display, on the second display means) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 that are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened; Is feasible and
The sound control means is
When the first specific effect is executed, a specific sound is not output in the first stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), the main liquid crystal 5 displays the treasure box 57SH10) Speaker 8L, 8R does not output an appearance etc.) when
When the second specific effect is executed, a specific sound is output in the second stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the display of the treasure box 57SH10 is performed in the main liquid crystal 5) It is characterized in that the appearing sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R when the user

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by changing the mode of the effect.

(2) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention has a first display means (for example, the main liquid crystal 5 etc.) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, the second display means) more difficult to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal (57SH51 etc.), and the pachinko
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that performs control to cause the first display unit and the second display unit to perform display related to a game;
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
Sound control means (for example, voice control board 13 etc.) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means;
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect for displaying contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after displaying the treasure box 57SH10) after displaying the former stage after displaying the latter stage.
As the specific effect,
In the main liquid crystal 5, a first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)) is displayed after the first-stage display, which is the first-stage display, is performed by the first display means after the second-stage display. After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-4 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 which are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened;
A second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the second liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the second stage display after performing the second stage display, which is the first stage display, on the second display means) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 that are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened; Is feasible and
The sound control means is
The sound output mode is made different between when the first specific effect is performed and when the second specific effect is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), the main liquid crystal 5 has a treasure box) When 57SH10 is displayed, no leading sound is output as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), and as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), when treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on sub liquid crystal 57SH51, As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), a precursor sound is output, etc.).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by changing the mode of the effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), the display control means does not execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect at the same time (for example, the treasure box 57SH10 displayed on the main liquid crystal 5) The treasure box 57SH10 displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 may not be executed in one variable display, and the like.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

  Note that "simultaneous" in which the first specified effect and the second specified effect are not performed simultaneously is the time between the start and the end of one specified effect of the first specified effect and the second specified effect. For example, during one variable display, the first specified effect and the second specified effect are not performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display control means executes the specific effect by the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10 in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C) (D), in the main liquid crystal 5, the treasure box 57SH10 is opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 May be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, since the player can easily recognize the rendering result, it is possible to improve the interest.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), the specific effect is an advance notice effect that suggests an effect other than the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. Suggested treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5, treasure box effect that suggests a change in the pending display displayed in the pending display area 57SH 52, as shown in FIG. 21-8, as shown in FIG. 21-8, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative pattern displayed on the screen may be a treasure box effect or the like for anticipating a pseudo-series effect that appears to perform a plurality of changes in one change.

  According to the above configuration, since the variations suggested for effects other than the specific effect increase, it is possible to improve the interest.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of fluctuation pattern and reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a preliminary production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine in a state where a gaming machine frame is opened. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) Is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern determination table for loss. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd special variable winning prize ball device. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of storage area in RAM of a main board. It is a figure showing a memory map of CPU in a main board. It is a figure showing a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-6) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is an explanatory view explaining movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows a part of game control main processing. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect of 1st starting winning a prize production and 2nd starting winning a prize production. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in the modification 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in the modification 2. FIG. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing in a modification 3; (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification 4, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of the display monitor in the modification 4. FIG. FIG. 18 is a view showing a security cover in a fifth modification. FIG. 18 is a view showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in the fifth modification. FIG. 18 is a view showing a security cover in a modification 6; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing opening and closing of a gaming machine frame in a sixth modification. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modification 7; It is a figure which illustrates production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting value conversion processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the conversion method to the setting secrecy value of a setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a part of display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value update process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination ratio of morning 1 background production (setting value suggestion production). It is a front view of a pachinko game machine containing feature part 48SH. (A) shows a display device for displaying a treasure box and a diagram for explaining display characters, (B) shows an execution ratio of a treasure chest effect, (C) shows a look-ahead treasure box effect contents determination table, D) shows an SP reach loss treasure box effect content determination table, and (E) shows an SP reach big hit treasure box effect content determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of treasure box effect determination processing of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of 1st Embodiment of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of 1st Embodiment of characteristic part 57SH. It is a time chart of an example of production operation of a 1st embodiment of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of 2nd Embodiment of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of 2nd Embodiment of characteristic part 57SH. It is a time chart of an example of production operation of a 2nd embodiment of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of the modification of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of the modification of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of the modification of characteristic part 57SH. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation of the modification of characteristic part 57SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of special symbols (also referred to as special figures) as plural types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the special symbol and the variation of the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the aspect which blink-displays a certain symbol is also contained in a fluctuation | variation. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stop as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special view". Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game". In addition, one type of special symbol display device for performing variable display of special symbols may be used.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be configured of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, upper and lower) in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Scroll display of direction and update display). Note that the special view game to be executed synchronously and the variable display of the decorative symbol are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area may be provided for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended, or an active display corresponding to the variable display under execution. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending storages. The number of pending storages corresponding to the first special view game is also referred to as a first pending storage number, and the number of pending storages corresponding to the second special view game is also referred to as a second pending storage number. The total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A includes the number of lighted LEDs. Thus, the first number of pending storages is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second number of pending storages according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a predetermined open state where a gaming ball can enter, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a first special view game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (normally driven combination) forms a second start winning opening which is changed to a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type part having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing pieces Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the gaming ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start It is also said that the winning opening will be open.). When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and a second special view game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electrically operated tulip type part.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning mouth door (for special electric combination) is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as winning balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

  It is also called "winning" that the game ball enters each winning opening including the general winning opening 10. In particular, winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments of LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also referred to as a common game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the common-play game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided which operates according to the effect.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like to fire the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided to provide a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting plate (lower plate) from which winning balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when a game ball passes passage gate 41 during a period during execution of the last game of a game (when a game ball passes passage gate 41, but a game game based on the passage can not be executed immediately) The regular game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

  In this common-play game, when a specific normal symbol (per-flat symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol is "per common-word". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per common drawing (general drawing loss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". When it becomes "per common plan", opening control is performed to open the variable winning prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the start winning opening (winning) during the period during execution of the special figure game, and the period controlled to the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state to be described later (start winning is generated When the special figure game based on the starting winning combination can not be executed immediately), the special figure game based on the entry is suspended from being executed up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  If special symbols (big hit symbols such as "7", the actual symbols differ according to the big hit type described later) are displayed as special symbols in the special figure game, they will be "big hits" and they will be big hit symbols If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from that is displayed stopped, it becomes "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (a lost symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is a "loss".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", the small hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. In the open state, of an elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of gaming balls entering the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period in which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an open upper limit period. A cycle in which the special winning opening is thus opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to execute repeatedly until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the jackpot gaming state, the player can obtain a winning ball by advancing the gaming ball into the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

  In the "big hit", a big hit type is set. For example, a large winning opening opening mode (round number and opening upper limit period), a gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) prepared a plurality of types, according to these The type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type capable of obtaining many prize balls, or a jackpot type with few prize balls or hardly capable of obtaining prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit gaming state, the opening mode similar to the big hit gaming state at the time of some big hit classifications (the number of opening of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same Etc.) the big winning opening is open. As in the case of the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state.

  In the short time state, control (time reduction control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure changes) compared to the normal state. In the time saving state, by shortening the average spread map fluctuation time (period for changing the spread map) than in the normal state, or by improving the probability of being “per spread map” in the spread game game, than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (in particular, the second special symbol) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, probability variation control is performed in which the probability that the display result is a "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability change state is a state more advantageous to the player because the probability change state of the special symbol is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The time saving state or the probability changing state continues until any one end condition such as the fact that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. It is also referred to as “the number of times cut (short in the number of times, short in the number of times definite change, etc.)” as the end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is the end condition.

  The normal state is a gaming state other than the special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state which is advantageous for the player, a short time state, a definite change state, etc., and the display result in the common drawing game is "per common drawing". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special view game will be a "big hit" is a preset state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case of system reset) It is a state controlled in the same way as when the processing was not performed.

  A state in which the probability change control is being performed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being performed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low base state. In combination, the short time state is also referred to as a low probability high base state, the positive variation state is also referred to as a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high certainty state and the low base state are also referred to as the high certainty base state.

  After the small hit gaming state ends, the change of the gaming state is not performed, and the control result of the special drawing game is continuously controlled to the previous gaming state to become the "small hit" (but the "small hit" occurs) When the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary to have a "small hit" as a display result of the special drawing game.

  The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the gaming ball passes the specific area, it may be controlled to be in the positive changing state after the big hit gaming state.

(Progress of progress etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of informing the progress of the game or boosting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The said effect is demonstrated below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 The operation may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, etc.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or (2) In response to the start of the special figure game, variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, the finalized decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived).

  In a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the aspect of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach aspect (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, variable display is performed for the decorative symbol not yet stopped and displayed. Is the aspect that is continuing.

  In addition, reach production is executed corresponding to becoming the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative design. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) in which the display result (display result of the special drawing game or display of the variable display of the decorative symbol) becomes “big hit” according to the presentation mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are performed. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 The display result of the variable display of the symbol becomes "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, "7" etc.) is displayed on stop on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right". .

  If it is a "probable big hit" controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are aligned and stop displayed, and after the end of the big hit gaming state In the case of "non-probable variation big hit (usually big hit)" which is not controlled, even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be arranged to be stopped and displayed. In this case, an odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and an even number decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation symbol (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with a non-deterministic symbol, a promotion effect that finally becomes a "possibly large hit" may be executed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "small hit", a finalized combination symbol (for example, "a small hit combination defined in advance as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5). 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state of the same aspect as small hit gaming state) and when it becomes "small hit" , A fixed finalized design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special view game is "loss", the display mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, but the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (" Sometimes it is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). Also, when the display result is "loss", a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination ("reach loss") as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach aspect. There is also a case where the finalized decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach loss”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The advance notice effects include advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display in execution, and pre-reading notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be performed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol temporarily while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, the variable display is resumed to make one variable display appear as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo series effect may be performed.

  During the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot during the jackpot to notify the jackpot gaming state is executed. As the jackpot effect, an effect of informing the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, during the small hitting during the small hitting game state which is notified the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit gaming state, and some of the big hit type (big hit type of the big hit gaming state of the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type that makes the subsequent gaming state highly probable) Depending on the state, the player may not know whether the present is in the small hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state by executing a common effect. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of suspension), execution of a common drawing game (including management of suspension), big hit It has a function to control gaming state, small hit gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effects control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when performing various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which stored contents are stored for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded on the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, input ports to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, and first hold. An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the common view hold display 25C and the like, and a solenoid drive signal) is configured.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass) from various switches (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls. A detection signal or the like indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, it is detected that the game ball has passed or entered.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary motorized role and the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), as part of the control of the progress of the game, according to the progress of the game effect control command (command to specify (notice) the progress of the game etc.) effect control board Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main substrate 11 is relayed by the relay substrate 15 and supplied to the effect control substrate 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main substrate 11 (for example, display results of special drawing games (including a big hit type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special drawing games (described in detail later) ), Game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), command for designating occurrence of error and the like are included.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects (various effects corresponding to the progress of the game based on the effect control command received, It has a function of performing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, and the like.

  On the effect control board 12, a CPU 120 for effect control, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed) (Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effects based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when detecting an operation by the player and appropriately indicating the contents of the operation). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes rendering based on a rendering execution instruction from the rendering control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the execution instruction of the effect from the effect control CPU 120. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for specifying a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. And the lamp control board 14 is supplied with a lamp signal (a signal for specifying the lamp on / off mode). Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9 and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the display control unit 123 controls voice output and lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes an audio output, control of lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 can count value data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects so as to be updateable. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and various signals (image signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the voice control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. As in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of sub substrates may be provided for each function, or one sub substrate may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main substrate 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes gaming control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, first, the CPU 103 sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initialization is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port or the like), setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply substrate. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, on the image display device 5, screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before it becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, and the like) for progressing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code), and determines whether the data is normal (step S4) S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of the power supply stop, for example, by the parity bit or the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 102 (content of backed up data). As a result, when the power supply is stopped, the gaming state is restored, and when the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by execution of the timer interrupt processing for game control described later. It will be

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits, to the effect control board 12, an effect control command instructing recovery from power failure (step S 7). At the same time, the effect control command for specifying the gaming state before power interruption that has been backed up, or the effect control for specifying the display result of the special figure game in progress when the special figure game is being executed A command may be sent. These commands can use the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been made or that the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the setting of the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Then it enters loop processing. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening are performed via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 have been received (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hit, etc.) supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times and the like of the probability variation state) are output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt to realize management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, control of the playing state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the pass gate 41) management of execution and suspension of the common figure game, It enables the release control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per game". The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the general drawing reserve display is displayed by turning on the ordinary drawing suspension display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power failure occurs, processing for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission of an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, processing for detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, processing may be executed to determine whether the display result or the variation pattern is read ahead. After storing the hold information and the number of held memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of start winnings, the number of held memories, and the pre-reading judgment is performed on the effect control board 12 . For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the effect control command at the start winning combination set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each processing (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process processing, transmission setting for transmitting a rendering control command corresponding to each processing to the rendering control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special view game or the second special view game based on the presence / absence of the hold information and the like. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for display result determination, whether the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" in the case of "big hit" Are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a determined special symbol (one of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special figure game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special view game using the second special view may be executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view (also referred to as special view 2 priority digest). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order termination).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random value are assigned to determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other determinations on the main substrate 11 and various determinations on the effect control substrate 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is used using random value for variation pattern determination based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit" or the like. The process of deciding on etc. is included. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (such as presence or absence of reach), and the variable display of the decorative symbol The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is designated, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol to be the display result of the special symbol is stop displayed (derived) The process for setting up is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". In addition, when the display result is “loss”, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time cut is completed and control is made in the time saving state or the positive change state. When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set the big winning opening to the open state based on the display result becoming "big hit" etc. It is done. When the special winning opening is opened, processing for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period for setting the big winning opening in an open state, and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set, for example, in accordance with which jackpot type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6", End the process during the big hit open.

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the set upper limit number of times, or when the upper limit number of times reached the big hit gaming state Includes the process of setting for terminating the program. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special drawing process flag is updated, the big hit release post-processing ends.

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to wait until waiting time corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of big hit gaming state, processing corresponding to the end of big hit gaming state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and short time control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process for setting the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit open pre-processing ends.

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the small hit gaming state end timing comes, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "10", and the small hit open processing is ended.

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing is ended.

(Main operation of presentation control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. In addition, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S75, an effect control process process is performed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decoration light such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the movable body 32 Control to operate various rendering devices is performed, such as driving operation. Further, with regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number updating process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S73. Before returning to the process of step S73, another process may be performed.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes preread advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the presentation control command at the start winning combination transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Moreover, the process for displaying a pending | holding display is performed based on the pending | holding memory number specified from the said production control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11 or the like. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the fluctuation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, reach effect and various types The presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the manner and timing of execution start thereof are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) in which the determination result and the like are reflected is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S 171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, a command (electric decoration signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or the command specifying that the main decorative object 11 is made to stop and display the decorative symbol is received In response to what has been done, the fixed decoration pattern that is the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the finalized decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends.

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special view, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command designating start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6 Update to On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit middle effect processing. In addition, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost" when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started. Thus, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the rendering process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hit medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of a command specifying termination of the small hit gaming state from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit ending effect. Update to a certain "5" and end small hitting medium effect processing.

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hitting end effect processing is ended.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit internal effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit inside effect processing, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the command specifying the end of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11 Update to 7 ′ ′ and complete the big hit internal rendering process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., and performs various effect control of ending effect at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the setting contents. Run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value, and the ending effect processing is ended.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the gaming media and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the light-off of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device of Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%” May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

(Description of feature portion 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining types of fluctuation patterns and reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the change display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach loser fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1-2 in which the display result is "loss". Change pattern of the display of the variation pattern PA2-1-PA2-6, PA3-1-PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit", and the display result becomes "loss" because the form of the variable display of the decorative design becomes the reach mode. Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are performed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggested effect which suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown in the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is: normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B < <The order of Super Reach A is higher. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines becoming a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. In addition, during the production of the reach of the super reach, there may be a case in which the development presentation is performed to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A, and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the degree of reliability evolves to a super reach one stage higher, a variation pattern in which the degree of credibility evolves in two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern may be provided in which the development effect is performed a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest degree of reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E with the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach by display only, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and voice. As described above, notification of a title is performed by more rendering devices in the case of the highly reliable reach than in the case of the less reliable reach. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively heard, and the effect of presentation is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (such as gothic and Mincho type) and the typeface (such as a line and a calligraphy) may be made different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect contents of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following rendering operation is executed by the rendering control CPU 120 executing rendering control process processing based on the rendering control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of super reach according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the numeral 7 on the "left" and the "right" is stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of becoming the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9D, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the introduction of the super reach effect (also referred to as super reach effect) is ended, for example. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the letter "SP reach A") is displayed, and a voice (here, "Super reach A") corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8 , And the title of Super Reach A is informed. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9E, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The following part of the reach effect of Super Reach A to be performed is executed. The production in which the characters face each other is also referred to as battle production, and it becomes a big hit when the ally character wins in the battle production, and loses when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when displaying words on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to displaying in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like as a subtitle.

(Super reach B)
In the case of becoming the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introductory portion of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9F, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is a title 31AK005 of super reach B (here Then, the letters "SP reach B" are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. Ru. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9G, the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other The following part of the reach effect of Super Reach B to be performed is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach effect. By doing this, since the title can be notified after showing the introduced part of the super reach effect to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the title notification.

  Also, with Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ... and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introductory part until it is alert | reported, super reach presentation is performed in a common presentation mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is to be achieved after the start of the super reach effect, and which title is to be notified. In Super Reach A and Super Reach B, it is not limited to completely sharing the presentation mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by watching the presentation, etc. The parts may be in a common presentation mode. For example, in the introductory part of super reach A and super reach B, super reach production (for example, production which displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a mode related to a title notified thereafter You may By doing this, the rendering effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the rendering. In this manner, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31 AK 007 of the Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP reach D”) is displayed on a part of the center of the image display device 5 At the same time, the sound of the title of Super Reach D is notified by the speaker 8 outputting a voice corresponding to the title of Reach (in this case, "kill the enemy"). As described above, in Super Reach D, a title is notified at the start of Super Reach production. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree indication 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but it does not have to completely match with the big hit reliability of the reach.

  In addition, the alerting | reporting by the audio | voice of super reach D is not alert | reporting a title name as it is, but the content of reach is alert | reported. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is made different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification form of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31 AK 007 and the expectation degree indication 31 AK 008 continue to be displayed by being reduced in the upper right portion or the like of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can grasp the expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In addition, in FIG.9 (I), although the production | presentation content in common with FIG.9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) is shown, the super reach production only for super reach D may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9J, the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, and the serif 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. Ru.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of the Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 Thus, the title of Super Reach E is informed. In Super Reach E, notification of a title by voice is not performed. Also, in conjunction with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 which is the enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other To be executed. As described above, in the Super Reach E, a title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low hit probability, it is possible to prevent giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title notification is performed (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the case of super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of the super reach with a high hit probability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach reach production with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title will be announced at the start. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have high jackpot reliability, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach, which have low jackpot reliability, In E, the title was notified at the start of the Super Reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of Super Reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the reach effect.

(Display area of title)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is The title is notified in a part (second area) of the screen of. By doing this, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a large hit reliability, since title notification is performed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display area for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

  The method of varying the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be optionally changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit probability, title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low degree of reliability. Further, in the case where the display area to be notified of the title is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the place to be displayed may be made different.

(Expected degree indication indication)
In this embodiment, super reach A and super reach B with high hit reliability do not display anticipation indication in the title notification in super reach A and super reach D with lower hit reliability than super reach A and super reach B. In the title notification in, the expectation indication was displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the effects from being disturbed. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E whose jackpot reliability is lower than Super Reach D, the expectation indication is not displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying the expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the low reliability reach. Note that the expectation indication may be displayed on at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, but may indicate the degree of expectation with a meter or gauge, or correspond to the degree of expectation You may make it display the numerical value. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, in the case of showing by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased by enabling display of a half equivalent (half) of black stars.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach presentation is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In addition, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach presentation. Moreover, by performing as described above, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed since it is possible to improve the rendering effect regardless of the display end timing.

  In addition, although it is abbreviate | omitted about the production | presentation operation | movement of the reach production of the super reach C here, the title alert | report according to big hit reliability and an expectation degree suggestion display should just be performed, for example.

(Decided production)
After each reach effect is performed, when it is time to derive the display result (end of the variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is “big hit” is performed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit", and a decision effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the determined effect that the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the allied character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The finalized design is derived. In addition, if a display result is "loss", the image which shows that the ally character loses is displayed, and the finalized decoration pattern used as a reach loss combination is derived | led-out.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a clear title notification.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, during the reach effect of super reach, the decorative symbol is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display, but in the reach effect How to make the display of the decoration pattern of is optional. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying a character that is permanently displayed during hold display, active display, variable display or display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect during the reach effect of the super reach. It may be At that time, during low-reliability reach effects such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively expected by the reach effect with low reliability, and to be able to pay attention to the reach effect in the highly reliable reach effect.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the rendering operation when the development rendering is performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the development effect is performed when the reach effect of the super reach D is being performed (the title notification of the super reach D is being performed), as shown in FIG. 11B. As shown, an effect such that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is performed. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing title notification by display and sound, title notification by display and sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 11 (B), but may be an effect in which a crack is gradually broken on the screen, or a sandstorm (display as if it is broken) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, unexpected effects can be performed. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gasse, such as an effect in which a reach is not developed, although a crack gradually enters the screen.

(Expected degree suggestive production)
In the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (H), a black star indicating the expected degree is displayed from the beginning that the expected degree indication 31AK008 indicates the expected degree, but five white stars are displayed at first, It may be made to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indication 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation degree indication 31AK021 A presentation is performed that fits within one of the white stars. At this time, an audio "pin" indicating that the black star indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) outputted from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the degree of expectation indication 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted as if it were illuminated. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect is finished.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation indication indicates one step at a time, but two or more black stars The degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. In addition, half black stars may be displayed to increase the expectation by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Also, there may be a case where the voice is not output. By doing this, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation increasing at one time, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expectation increasing as it is displayed on the white star indicating the expectation degree indication. You may make it perform such an effect.

(Demonstration mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different rendering mode, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the rendering based on the command is executed in a different rendering mode. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound outputted from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are example rendering operation examples of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion rendering in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the rendering mode. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation degree suggestion effects are performed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 different in the effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, as shown in FIG. 12G, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. Moreover, the expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a rhombus.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12H, a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12I, the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation indication 31AK024 A presentation is performed that fits within one of the white diamonds of. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pong" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is settled in the expectation degree indication display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted as if illuminated. Thus, depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title, and the effect is achieved. improves.

  Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the rendering operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, another reach rendering (title notification, expectation degree suggestion rendering) is performed depending on the rendering mode (state when the reach rendering is performed) May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is to be notified or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing this, effects according to the player's preferences can be performed, and the effects of the effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree indication display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect of increasing the number of black stars in a stepwise manner is performed, but the expectation degree It is also possible to execute an expectation indication effect of decreasing the number of indications suggesting a. Such an expected degree suggestive effect may be performed in addition to or in place of the expected degree suggestive effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of developmental direction)
In the case of executing an expectation degree indication effect of increasing the display degree indicating the expectation degree of the expectation degree indication display step by step, the development effect may be performed after the display indicating the expectation degree is increased. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed not in stages but at one time. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 5 The development effect for displaying the image 31AK031 is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the characters “SP reach C”) is displayed, and thus the super The title of Reach C is informed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source is switched to the title notification of the development destination, so that it can be easily understood which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree indication 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, it is displayed at one time. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect may be performed in which the title and the indication indicating the degree of expectation change.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the notice effect, a title notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed according to a notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, while the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, the title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), a title preview in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title preview is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title preview is executed. In the title preview shown in FIG. 14, there may be a case where the display mode (display color) of the title changes after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed other than black from the start of display of the title.

  In addition, when a title advance notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, an audio according to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing this, it is possible to enhance the staging effect of the preliminary presentation. Further, the title notification by audio may be performed after the display mode (display color) of the title changes. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after change.

(Title execution timing)
It is preferable to execute notification of a title during reach at a timing other than the execution timing of a presentation (specific presentation) such as a preliminary presentation production or a development presentation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing this, when the title is notified once, an effect of improving the expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the advance presentation effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the execution of the advance presentation effect and the presentation mode. The preview control effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance presentation effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (presence or absence of the execution of the preview of the title) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "loss", the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. The display color of the Super Reach title changes from "Black" to "Red" or from "Black" to "Fruit" as shown in Fig. 16A. What changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the rendering effect is improved.

  In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be "fruit pattern" . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is performed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the one in which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the display period of the title is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine one of the changing timings. Then, in the case of a super reach (for example, super reach A or super reach B) in which the display period of the title is short, the number of changing timing may be one or less than the super reach in which the display period of the title is long.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and in the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16B in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the preview of the title different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice for giving notice of the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character's serif in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After the display color of the Super Reach title is determined, the display color of the character's speech (the presence or absence of the serif announcement) in the reach effect of the Super Reach is determined (Step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "loss", the display color of the speech in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display color of the speech in the reach production changes from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order) Big hit reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the speech. By doing this, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the speech, and the rendering effect is improved. It should be noted that, for those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. There may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes with respect to the one in which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be made different according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the jackpot reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the presentation style of the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the same presentation mode (display color) is included in the title preview and the speech preview, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same presentation mode is obtained. Also, the big hit reliability may be made different depending on the combination of the change timing of the presentation mode with the title preview and the speech preview. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big hit reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing this, it is possible to pay attention to the change timings of the title preview and the speech preview.

  When the effect mode includes the normal mode and the special mode, in the special mode, the display color of the speech may be determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from that in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that in place of the speech notice, a notice effect may be executed to give notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided, and the big hit reliability may be different according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the speech in the reach effect or when it is determined not to be the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31 S001; No), the execution presence or effect mode is determined for other advance effects (step AK31 S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance presentation effect determination process is ended.

  In this embodiment, in the case of the super reach, it is possible to execute the title preview and the speech preview, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the low reliability super reach), the title preview. And at least one of the serif announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title preview and the speech preview have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and may be changed according to, for example, the type of super reach. By doing this, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of effect modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title preview and the speech preview. By doing this, the effects are diversified and the effect is enhanced. In the title preview and the speech preview, the number of playable presentation modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of playable production modes may be the same. By doing this, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Effect production)
When the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes, a presentation may be performed that indicates that the presentation mode changes. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a speech may be performed. Then, after the effect presentation is performed, the presentation mode (display color) of the title or speech may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image etc.) of the action effect may be common to any of the title and the words. Note that there may be cases where the presentation mode of the title or speech does not change despite the action presentation being performed. In the case of executing the effect presentation, the presence / absence of the execution of the operation presentation, the execution timing, and the presentation mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title preview and the speech preview. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31 S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the presentation mode of the title preview and the speech preview changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the function presentation) may be different according to the presentation mode of the action presentation, The ratio (the ratio of acting on which effect mode) of the serif announcement and which presentation mode changes may be different, or the ratio of what color (in which stage) changes may be different. . By executing such an operation effect, the player becomes aware of which one of the title and the speech to act when the operation effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of effect effects and effect modes may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing this, it is possible to execute the action presentation according to the presentation mode, and the presentation effect is improved.

  As another example of such effect presentation, at least one of the presentation aspect (display color) of either the title or the speech according to the presentation content of the reach presentation (for example, the action of the character, the presentation content in the battle presentation, etc.) May change. By doing this, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic parts described in the above embodiment are not essential components, and can be appropriately omitted.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Although the term “sub-liquid crystal” is used here, the sub-display device may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub-liquid crystal, various effects such as display of preliminary effects and hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title notification, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title in the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the indication of the degree of expectation. By doing this, it is possible to easily understand the title and the expectation indication which can display the title and the expectation indication without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 5.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a reach effect title as a suggested effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to title notification (information that mainly displays characters) regarding other effects. May be For example, in the case of executing pre-reading zone effect in which the background image in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) different as the pre-notice effect, for example, The present invention may be applied to the title notification of When presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate an enemy using a stick controller, etc.”), and execute a mission effect that will be in the player's favor when the mission is achieved. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modified Example 1 of Feature 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is performed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10 (B)-(D). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for urging the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected in the operation valid period. The display result may be indicated by displaying the outcome of the battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing this, since the display result is indicated according to the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing an example of the production operation of the super reach in the modification in which the operation effect is executed and the display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to 18 (I), reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 are confronted is executed.

  Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, the small button image 31AK043 and the restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thus, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that operation effects are to be executed are prepared. And big hit reliability differs according to which operation production image is displayed and operation production is performed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is performed during the reach effect may be changed to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is a large button image 31AK047. Change to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18H, the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18I, the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, an operation effect indicating that the operation effect image changes when the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the operation effect is performed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18J, the control line 31AK044 is erased and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed at the central portion as shown in FIG. 18K before a predetermined time when the display result is derived. , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation to the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 18 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. Thereafter, at the end of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. When an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation valid period, an image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image The jackpot confidence is high. Even when the operation effect image with a low degree of reliability is displayed, the operation effect image with a high degree of reliability may be changed during the reach effect, so the effect of presentation is improved, and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the rendering operation example shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the notification of the reach title and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but in parallel with the reach rendering and the operation rendering shown in FIG. It may be performed. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (presence or absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence or absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG.

(Modified Example 2 of Feature 31AK)
A suggestion display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. For example, the shutter effect that performs the first indication display and the reach title effect that performs the second indication display may be performed. In the shutter effect, after the start of variable display, an effect of covering the screen with shutter display is performed. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title preview of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined in another process.

  The specific image is an image of high hit reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In any of the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect execution, when the display is performed with the fruit pattern image, the big hit reliability is higher than the time when the display is not performed with the fruit pattern image. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including each of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, the pattern of images other than a fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image which shows big hit reliability when shutter production and reach title production are performed. For example, white images <blue images <red images <fruit pattern images may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter, a reach title of red characters, etc.). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing a shutter display and a reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, notification that the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The light emission control of the common sound and the game effect lamp 9 indicates to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. In performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification on the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display in the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all of the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, at the time of the shutter effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, as shown in FIG. 19 (b), variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The downward arrow indicates the variable display of the left, middle and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed small at the upper right of the screen and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, characters of "battle reach" indicating that reach effect with battle effect is to be executed are displayed.

  Further, at the time of the reach title effect execution, the notification to output the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after the common sound is output, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Tsui Tsui”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the indication to be displayed is smaller than that of the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed by outputting the specific sound. Although the case where the output period is completely divided has been described for the common sound and the specific sound, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "battle won!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit was decided by having won the battle. When the battle effect is over, it returns to the variable display screen by the original number symbol. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped, and a big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this manner, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high hit probability has been displayed.

  In addition, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. In this way, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from being obscured by overlapping execution timings.

  The determination (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) relating to the shutter effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. At that time, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31 AKS 002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily performed. Further, the determination of the reach title effect may be performed in step 31AKS 004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination of the shutter effect.

(Additional note on feature part 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Indication production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) which can execute suggestion production (for example, reach production) which suggests that it is controlled to a state, and title informing means (for example, production The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 9 (D), (F)). ).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period May be implemented in a common manner (eg, FIG. 9C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which suggestion effect is performed, and the interest is improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) indicative of being controlled to the advantageous state at a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution. It may be executable, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even after the notification of the title.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the suggestion effect execution unit is configured to set at least a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and (2) It is possible to execute 2 indication effects (for example, reach effects of super reach D and super reach E), and in the second indication effect, the title notification means may start the second indication effect from the start of the second indication effect. The title corresponding to may be notified.

  According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be performed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the ratio in which the first suggestion effect is executed is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher than when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is also good.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the suggestion effect execution unit is capable of executing the suggestion effect in a presentation mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period. May be

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), a detection means (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player and a specific display corresponding to the detection means ( For example, specific display execution means (for example, CPU 120 for presentation control) which performs small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display execution means is the first specific display as the specific display. (For example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first specific display can be displayed. After displaying the first specific display in the non-effective period of (1) Change the specific display to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)), and in the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after change May be performed (for example, FIG. 18 (J), (K)).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), a first indication indicating that the indication size is the first size as an indication suggesting an expectation of control to the advantageous state (FIG. 19) (A) display by shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown at (a)), and a second suggested display whose display size is the second size (the display at the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19 (d) The display unit (for example, the image display device 5 and the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the two-sized reach title image 31AK062 etc.) is further provided, and the display unit is a plurality of types of elements having different modes (FIG. 19A) (D), the component E1 (banana), the component E2 (melon), the component E3 (apple), the component E4 (watermelon), the component E5 (strawberry), etc. Images (such as fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) can be displayed, and either of the first indication and the second indication can be displayed in a pattern including the specific image. A plurality of elements are displayed so as to be included in any of the first indication display and the second indication display (in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) May be displayed to include the elements E1 to E5).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

(Description of feature part 109SG)
Next, the features of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 20A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. A pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 109SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board, and a gaming machine for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2 It consists of a frame (underframe) 3. A game area is formed on the game board 2. In this game area, game balls as game media are fired from a predetermined ball striking device and are shot. In addition, in the gaming machine frame 109SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 109SG003a having the glass window opens the front of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position where the front is closed. It is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 109SG003a. When the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 109SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a salesclerk of the game arcade or the like in front of a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk The door frame 109SG003a can not be opened.

  The main substrate 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a substrate case 109SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, a lock switch 109SG 051 for switching to a setting change state or setting confirmation state described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot probability (out-of-pocket rate) described later in the setting change state are changed on the main substrate 11. A setting changeover switch 109SG052 functioning as a setting switch is provided.

  A setting switching main body portion provided with an operation portion operable by the player such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 is accommodated in the substrate case 109SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back right portion of the substrate case 109SG201 so as to be operable without opening the substrate case 109SG201.

  Since the board case 109SG201 having the lock switch 109SG 051 and the setting change switch 52 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is extremely difficult in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. Operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 3 to use. Further, since the lock switch 109SG 051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk who holds the setting key can be operated. In addition, the lock switch 109SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation, which are described later, using the setting key. In this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are illustrated as being separate keys, but one key may be shared.

  Further, in the substrate case 109SG201, a display monitor 109SG029 and a display switching switch 109SG030 for switching the display of the display monitor 109SG029 are arranged. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display switching switch 109SG030 are connected to the main substrate 11 and disposed at the upper left portion of the substrate case 109SG201. That is, the display monitor 109SG029 and the display switching switch 109SG030 are disposed in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 109SG201. The main substrate 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main substrate 11 is the back side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4, the right side of the outer frame 109SG001a includes the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 52 at the time of closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003. A security cover 109SG500A is attached which covers the rear side of the unit. The curity cover 109SG500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 109SG500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 109SG500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 109SG500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is comprised by the plate-shaped synthetic resin material which has permeability. The upper and lower dimensions of the short piece 109SG500Aa are substantially the same as the upper and lower dimensions of the back plate of the substrate case 109SG201. The security cover 109SG500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 109SG001a via the front end of the short piece 109SG500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-3, the long piece 109SG500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 109SG201 from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Thus, the right side portion of the board case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 become inoperable by the long piece 109SG500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-4, in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 move together with the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and from the long piece 109SG500Ab By being separated, the covering state by the long piece 109SG500Ab is released, and thus the operation becomes possible.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500A restricts the operation on the operation unit including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052. In the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened while the state is maintained, the restricted state by the security cover 109SG500A described above is released, and the operation of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

  Since the substrate case 109SG201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting change switch 109SG052 in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Unless the store clerk or the like in the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 109SG003 with the door key, the set value can not be changed by operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting change switch 109SG052.

  However, even if the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the game arcade, for example, another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The lock switch 109SG051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 allows an unauthorized member such as a wire or cell board to enter from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming apparatus such as a card unit installed between the Because there is a possibility that the fraudulent action of changing the setting value by operating the setting change switch 109SG052 may be performed, the security cover 109SG500A switches the setting with the lock switch 109SG051 with the lock cover 109SG500A in a state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed. Control that restricts the operation to the operation unit including switch 109SG052 By being maintained state, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  In addition, even in the restricted state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed and the back right side of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 is covered by the security cover 109SG500A, the substrate passes through the security cover 109SG500A having transparency. Since the main substrate 11 and the like accommodated in the case 109SG 201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 on which an electronic component such as the CPU 103 is mounted and the condition of the sealing seal can be easily confirmed.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 20-1). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of segments or dot matrix, etc., and includes plural types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure") is displayed variably (variation display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Below, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special figure" .

  The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are both formed in, for example, a rectangular shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type is It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99", respectively. . In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are illustrated in a square shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first special symbol display devices are not limited to this. The segments constituting the symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be arranged irregularly.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display 5, for example, three corresponding to the variation display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as, the effect pattern (also referred to as decorative symbol), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, is variably displayed.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the rendering symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special view game, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, the variation display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronization with this, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols that become the variable display result are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols etc (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuation display until the finalized design pattern is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started until the finalized design pattern that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0". For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the effect pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, nine kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or “han” are displayed on the display symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, nine character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “9”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to nine types, but may be any number (for example, eight types, ten types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  After the fluctuation display of the production design is started, until the fixed production design that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the one with the largest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number (for example, "9"). The effect symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from those with large symbol numbers to those with small symbols, When the effect pattern having the smallest number is displayed, subsequently, the effect pattern having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  A first hold storage display area 109SG005D and a second hold storage display area 109SG005U are disposed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the display in the lower part of the image display device 5 is suspended during fluctuation display. An active display area 109SG005F is displayed, which displays a pending display corresponding to storage as an active display. Here, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol. It occurs based on the start winnings by). That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol is satisfied, the variation display based on the start condition established earlier is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine When the start condition for permitting the start of the variable display is not established because 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the like, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed. The hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D is a hold display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the hold display in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U Is a hold display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening.

  In particular, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D according to the present embodiment displays the first first special view hold display from the bottom upwards, and the second display of the first special view hold display 1 The hold 2 display position to be displayed, the hold 3 display position to display the third first special view hold display, and the hold 4 display position to display the fourth first special view hold display are arranged in parallel, each hold The display can be displayed.

  Further, the character image 109SGC is displayed at the upper position of the first suspension storage display area 109SG005D in the image display device 5 (see FIG. 20-27). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although details will be described later, the pending display moves from the character image 109SGC toward the first pending storage display area 109SG005D or the active display area 109SG005F when a new start winning is generated. It is possible to execute the start winning presentation.

  In the present embodiment, a circular white display (a suspension displayed on the first suspension storage display area 109 SG 005 D) is generated as a suspension display generated based on the startup winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first startup winning opening. Memory display) and a circular white display of the hold display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening (hold storage displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U Display). In addition, based on the hold display generated based on the start winning by the gaming ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the starting winning by the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening The display mode of the generated hold display may be a different display mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-1, together with the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U, the number of special view hold storages in the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided to display in a distinguishable manner. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the first special view is suspended. The second special map reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the variable display using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  General winning openings 109SG050A and 109SG050D are provided on the left and right of the image display device 5, and general winning openings 109SG050B and 109SG050C are provided in the area below the general winning opening 109SG050A. Further, below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first start winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal open state (refer to the solid line position in FIG. 20A) and the tilting position (FIG. 20A in FIG. 20A) in the vertical position by the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary motorized product shown in FIG. An ordinary electric power part having a movable wing that changes to an enlarged open state to be a dotted line position) is provided to form a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary electric character is in the OFF state. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 109SG081 for the ordinary electric symbol is on. ) In an easy-to-expand state. Although the variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second start winning opening even in the normal opening state, the possibility of the game ball entering is lower than that in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be Alternatively, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " 4 ′ ′) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  The game ball having passed through (entered) the general winning opening 109SG050A, 109SG050B, 109SG050C, 109SG050D is the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch shown in FIG. 109SG026C, fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D is detected, based on the detection, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  A special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 in which a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B are integrated is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007 will be described. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to vertical and horizontal directions when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, the left side constitutes a first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, and the right side constitutes a second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B. A cover (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, and the player can select a special variable winning ball unit through the cover. It is possible to visually recognize game balls flowing in the 109SG007, particularly in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B.

  The first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A includes a first large winning opening door 109SG701 driven to open and close by a solenoid 109SG082 (see FIG. 20-2), and the first large winning opening door 109SG701 is in an open state and a closed state. Form a changing first big winning opening. The first large winning opening is formed to open upward at the left of the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. The first large winning opening door 109SG 701 can slide in the front-rear direction between the closing position where the first large winning opening is closed by driving the solenoid 109SG082 and the opening position where the first large winning opening is opened. ing.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, when the solenoid 109SG082 is in the ON state, the first large winning opening door 109SG 701 opens the first large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the first large winning opening (entry) Make it easy. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG082 is in the OFF state, the first large winning opening door 109SG701 closes the first large winning opening, and the game ball can not pass (enter) the first large winning opening. As described above, the first large winning opening changes into an open state advantageous for the player who easily passes (enters) the game ball, and a closed state disadvantageously for the player because the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition to the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the first big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the first big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball having passed (entered) the first big winning opening is detected by the first counting switch 109SG 023 by passing through the first count switch 109SG 023 (see FIG. 20-2) provided in the first big winning opening. Be done. The game ball having passed the first count switch 109SG 023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2. A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 109SG 023. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening that has been opened in the first special variable winning winning ball device 109SG007A, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the first large winning opening is opened in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, the gaming ball can enter the first large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening is closed in the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, it is impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the first large winning opening This is a second state disadvantageous to the player.

  In addition, most of the game balls that flowed down without entering the first big winning opening are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an obstacle nail or the like (not shown), and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enlarged open state, the second start It is supposed to win a prize opening.

  The second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B shown in FIG. 20-14 is formed to project upward than the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A, and is opened and closed by a solenoid 109SG083 (see FIG. 20-2). A second large winning opening door 109SG711, and the second large winning opening door 109SG711 forms a second large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. The second big winning opening is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B. The second large winning opening door 109SG711, between the first state (opened state) to open the second large winning opening by the drive of the solenoid 109SG083, and the second state (closed state) to close the second large winning opening It is provided so that it can slide in the front-rear direction.

  In the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is in the on state, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 with the second large winning opening is open, the gaming ball is the second 2 Make it easy to pass (enter) the big winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 109SG083 for the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 closes the second large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the second large winning opening. (Do not enter) As described above, the second large winning opening is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) the second big winning opening is provided. May be

  The game ball passing (entering) the second large winning opening is detected by the second counting switch 109SG024A by passing the second counting switch 109SG024A installed in the second large winning opening shown in FIG. 20-14. Be done. A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 109SG024A. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened in the second special variable winning winning ball device 109SG007B, other normal winnings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example More balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) the mouth. Therefore, when the second large winning opening is opened in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the second large winning opening is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the second large winning opening This is a second state disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 20-14, in the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B, a gaming ball flow path 109SG750 is formed, through which gaming balls having passed through the second big winning opening can flow. The game ball flow path 109SG750 is a main path 109SG740 (area along the solid line in FIG. 20-14) through which the game ball having passed the second big winning opening can pass, and a branch path 109SG741 branched from the main path 109SG740 (FIG. 14 and the region along the dotted line). A backflow prevention member 109SG730 described later is disposed between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741. Further, on the upstream side of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740, a first branch portion 109SG742 where the branch path 109SG741 branches from the main path 109SG740 is provided, and on the downstream side of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 in the main path 109SG740 A second branch portion 109SG743 is provided where the branch path 109SG741 branches from the main path 109SG740. That is, the gaming ball flowing down the main path 109SG 740 is movable from the first branch 109SG 742 or the second branch 109SG 743 to the branch 109 SG 741 side.

  A third count switch 109SG024B through which game balls can pass is installed at the most downstream part of the main path 109SG740, and the game balls pass the third count switch 109SG024B to be operated by the third count switch 109SG024B. It is detected. The gaming ball having passed through the third count switch 109SG024B is guided to the back side of the gaming board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the gaming board 2. Also, the gaming ball that has reached the most downstream portion of the branch path 109SG 741 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the gaming board 2 and passes the fourth count switch 109SG024C. , And detected by the fourth count switch 109SG024C.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the small hitting game is controlled to the big hitting gaming state based on the fact that the third counting switch 109SG024B detects the gaming ball during the small hitting game to be described later. There is. Therefore, during the small hit game, while the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is open, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration etc., and the game ball is detected by the third count switch 109SG024B. Also, since it becomes possible for the player to be tampered with being controlled to a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to stop the game in such a case.

  On the downstream side of the first branch portion 109SG742 in the main path 109SG740, a restriction member 109SG721 is provided which restricts and allows the flow of the gaming ball toward the third count switch 109SG024B. A restricting member 109SG721 restricts the flow toward the third count switch 109SG024B in the main path 109SG740 of the gaming ball by projecting into the main path 109SG740 by driving the solenoid 109SG085 (see FIG. 20-2). And a permitted state in which the game ball is allowed to flow toward the third count switch 109SG024B in the main path 109SG740 by retreating from within the main path 109SG740, and is provided slidably in the front-rear direction.

  The upper portion of the regulating member 109SG721 is formed to be a flat surface, and the flat surface is provided on the main path 109SG740 so as to form a predetermined angle downward toward the branch path 109SG741 side in a front view . Therefore, when the gaming ball flows down the main path 109SG740 while the regulating member 109SG721 is in the regulating state, the gaming ball travels along the flat surface formed on the upper portion of the regulating member 109SG721 and the second branch portion 109SG743. It is induced to flow downward toward the branch path 109SG741 via the route.

  Between the main path 109SG740 and the branch path 109SG741, a backflow prevention member 109SG730 is pivotally supported by a pivot directed in the front-rear direction. The backflow prevention member 109SG730 is a plate-like member whose upper end is pivotally supported by a pivot, and when the game ball guided by the flat surface of the restriction member 109SG721 contacts from the main path 109SG740 side, a branch path is branched from the main path 109SG740 side It can be moved (turned) so that it can pass to the 109SG 741 side. Specifically, it is pivotable between a permitted position inclined to open between the main path 109SG 740 and the branch path 109SG 741 and a restricted position closed to between the main path 109SG 740 and the branch path 109SG 741 It is provided. A rib 109SG801 projecting forward is provided above the regulating member 109SG721, and the backflow preventing member 109SG730 abuts against the rib 109SG801 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view at the regulating position.

  In addition, the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is normally disposed at the restricted position by its own weight, and in the restricted position, the gaming ball guided by the flat surface abuts from the main path 109SG740 side (right side in front view) The game ball is pushed by the game ball and pivots clockwise in front view with the allowable position as the upper limit.

  At this time, the vertical width between the tip of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch 109SG743 changes to be shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the main path provided with the third count switch 109SG024B Movement of the gaming ball from the 109SG 740 side to the branch path 109SG 741 side provided with the fourth count switch 109SG024C is permitted. On the other hand, when the backflow prevention member 109SG730 is in the restricted position, even if the game ball abuts from the branch path 109SG741 side (left side in front view), the backflow prevention member 109SG730 abuts against the rib 109SG801 to prevent backflow The counterclockwise rotation of the member 109SG 730 is restricted. At this time, the fourth dimension switch 109SG024C is provided because the width between the tip of the backflow prevention member 109SG730 and the lower portion of the second branch portion 109SG743 is maintained shorter than the diameter of the game ball. The movement of the game ball from the branch path 109SG741 side to the main path 109SG740 side where the third count switch 109SG024B is provided is surely restricted.

  Referring back to FIG. 20A, a normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 20A, to the left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The common drawing reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the common drawing reservation memory count as the number of valid passing balls which have passed through the passing gate 109SG041. The passage gate 109SG041 is disposed between the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007. A gate switch 21 described later is incorporated in the passage gate 109SG041.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, winning openings other than the above-described winning openings may be provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, a bat operating handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area is provided. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  Hold a game ball lent out as a winning ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 below the gaming area so that it can be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, there is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing. The upper tray member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. Is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming area is divided into a left gaming area on the left side and a right gaming area on the right side of the center decoration frame surrounding the image display device 5 disposed substantially at the center of the gaming area. The game ball that has been hit weakly with the bat operating handle (left hitting) flows down the first path (left gaming area), and the game ball that is hit hard with the bat operating handle is passing the second path (right hitting) It is supposed to flow down the right gaming area).

  In addition, the game ball which has flowed down the first route can be won by the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball which has flowed down the second route is the variable winning ball device 6B, the first special variable winning ball device A large number of obstacle nails are disposed to be able to win on the 109SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, and to be able to pass through the passing gate 109SG041. That is, in the case of a left-handed strike, the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A and the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B can not win, and can not pass through the passing gate 109SG041.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball having passed through the passage gate 109SG041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the common drawing start condition for execution is satisfied, for example, based on the common drawing start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol being satisfied, such as the end of the fluctuation display of the previous common drawing, for example The fluctuation display of the common figure by the symbol display 20 is started.

  In the fluctuation display of this common figure, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when the predetermined time which becomes the common fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which becomes the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, for example, as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variation display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and opening control (tilting control) is performed such that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is tilted. The normal release control is performed to return to the vertical position when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, the game ball passing through (enter) the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. For example, the variation display of the special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition by the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second special symbol display device 4B starts the variation display of the special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, due to the previous special variation display or the end of the big hit gaming state .

  In the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variation display of the special symbol, when the variation display time as the special figure variation time elapses, The finalized special symbol (variation display result) to be the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special view becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are the big hit symbols, and special symbols indicating the number “2” are the small hit symbols. , A special symbol showing a symbol of "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in the variation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the variation display of the special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the common symbol may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the variable display of both special views.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special figure and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening door of the first special variable winning ball device 109SG007A The first large winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated by the 109SG 701. As a result, a round is performed in which the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A is brought into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The round, which is the opening cycle of the first large winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “10”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round is ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the first large winning opening etc.) It is also good.

  In addition, after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the variation display of the special figure and becomes the “small hit” as the specific display result, in the small hit gaming state, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B 2 Large winning opening door 109SG711 open the second large winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) winning balls are generated It will be in the state. As a result, the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B is in an advantageous first state (opened state) for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the small hit game state, the game may be opened a plurality of times.

  In the small hit gaming state, when the game ball that has won the second large winning opening passes the third count switch 109SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B of the game ball It becomes a "big hit" based on (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening in the small hit gaming state passes the fourth count switch 109SG024C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 109SG024C of the gaming ball.

  When the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B, the second large winning opening door 109SG711 of the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds The second big winning opening is opened in the period until the lapse of a) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007B is set to the first state (opened state) advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 109SG007B is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the passage of the third count switch 109SG024B, The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning prize ball device 109SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “15”, “5”, etc.). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win at the second big winning opening etc.). Good.

  In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state in the present embodiment, time saving control and time saving control are performed when time shortening control (time saving control) is performed in a predetermined range of fluctuation numbers (for example, 100 times or 20 times). It is controlled either with no normal condition. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special drawing fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special drawing is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, variation display of a special figure is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, that the variation display result is "big hit", in the small hit gaming state It may be ended when any of the conditions for the game ball to pass through the third count switch 109SG024B is established first.

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) in the fluctuation display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B than in the normal state, Control to shorten the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the common drawing by the symbol display 20 (general drawing fluctuation time) shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result in the fluctuation display of each common drawing is "per common drawing" Control to improve the probability of becoming higher than that in the normal state, and the tilt control time for performing tilt control of the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fluctuation display result becoming "per common place" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to be longer than that and control to increase the number of tilting times more than in the normal state, to increase the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. At the player Advantageous to become control is performed taking. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the variable view of the special figure can be frequently executed. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit" is shortened. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various types such as a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a terminal board (information output board) 16, and a power board 17 as shown in FIG. Control board is mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various substrates such as, for example, a payout control substrate, a launch control substrate, and an interface substrate are disposed on the back of the gaming board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 109SG 201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-3 and FIG. 20-15 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 109SG029 visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 109SG029 is used. , Also has a function to display various winning information about the winning. A display changeover switch 109SG030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 109SG029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 can be switched by the operation of the display changeover switch 109SG030.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, the main substrate 11 is a door opening sensor 109SG090 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 109SG003a that covers the front of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening of the first large winning opening door 109SG701. A variety of sensors are connected such as the first large winning opening door sensor 109SG091 for detecting the second large winning opening door 109SG711, and the second large winning opening door sensor 109SG092 for detecting the opening of the second large winning opening door 109SG092. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on a detection signal output from a sensor.

  In addition to detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, the main substrate 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to 100, an output circuit 109SG111 for transmitting solenoid drive signals from the microcomputer 100 for gaming control to the solenoids 109SG 088 to 83, and information output for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 109SG016. A circuit 109SG112 is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-3 and FIG. 20-15 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 20-2 is sealed in a substrate case 109SG201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the main substrate A display monitor 109SG029 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed at the center of 11 and a display switching switch 109SG030 is disposed on the right side of the display monitor 109SG029. The display monitor 109SG029 and the display switching switch 109SG030 are disposed on the front when the main substrate 11 is viewed. The main substrate 11 can not be viewed in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is not opened, so the front when viewing the main substrate 11 is the back side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. It is the front at the time of visual recognition, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front of the main substrate 11 may be shared with the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the main substrate 11 is viewed.

  In addition, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), each winning a prize mouth (the 1st big winning a prize mouth, the 2nd big winning a prize mouth, the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth, the 1st starting winning a prize mouth, 1st-4th general winning a prize) The number of game balls entering the mouth, hereinafter also referred to as the “entry area”, is counted, and various winning information such as a running ratio and a winning ratio based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. By displaying these pieces of winning information, it is possible to confirm various types of winning information, such as a winning ratio and a winning ratio after installation in the game arcade. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the game board surface (pass the test) so that the game balls enter the general winning opening with a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed at a predetermined frequency whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed, it is confirmed as to what adjustments have been made and, as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening with a frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made after installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply substrate 17 is enclosed in a substrate case 109SG201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. A setting switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a lock switch 109SG051 (see FIG. 20-2) for switching to the confirmation state and a jackpot probability (out-rolling rate) described later in the setting change state. 109SG 052 (see FIG. 20-2) is provided.

  The lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can not be operated unless the gaming machine frame 109SG003 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the store clerk who holds the predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 109SG 051 requires key operation, among the store clerks in the game arcade, only the store clerk who holds the key for operating the lock switch 109 SG 051 can be operated. Further, the lock switch 109SG051 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation with a predetermined key, and is also a switch capable of executing an operation (for example, a pressing operation) different from the switching operation.

  As shown in FIG. 20-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won in each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out port are ejected out of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and in the nozzle, a discharge port switch 109SG 070 for detecting the game balls discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting the fired game balls) is provided. ing. The outlet switch 109SG 070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above as shown in FIG.

  The output circuit 109SG111 is also connected to a controller 109SG084 for driving the solenoid 109SG085. The controller 109SG084 starts driving control of the solenoid 109SG085 by receiving a start signal from the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 109SG111 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. When the controller 109SG084 drives the solenoid 109SG085, the restricting member 109SG721 repeats the restricting state and the permitting state every one second regardless of the gaming state.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 20-5 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed on the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable symbol display in the special figure game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a change display result such as a special symbol or an effect pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result And different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “big hit A”, and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying of a result of the preliminary determination that the variable display result is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command for notifying of a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "small hit B".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variation stop (decision) of the rendering symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is a game state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state , And the second game state specification command corresponding to the time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specifying command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the generated error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified in the effect control board 12 side which error (abnormality) has been judged to be generated. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22 B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol display device 4B was satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special view storage number in order to display the special view storage number in an identifiable manner in the first storage display area 109SG005D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number.

  The command D100 is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the V prize is won, that is, the third count switch 109SG024B is turned on when the gaming ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 The random number circuit 104 is configured to include an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 and a real time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  20-6 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 20-6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for the special view display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination, the disturbance for the variation pattern determination Numerical data indicating each of the numerical value MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the common drawing display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  In the present embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values in the range shown in FIG. 20-6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these random numbers are not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-7 shows fluctuation patterns in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "loss", the variation display mode of the effect design is "non-reach" and corresponds to each of the cases where it is "reach", and also variation. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the display result being a "big hit" or the like. In addition, one fluctuation pattern is prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "small hit" or the like. In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss" and the fluctuation display mode of the production pattern is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss fluctuation pattern") and fluctuation The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the rendering pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. Multiple normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. It is done. Further, with regard to the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed. The special pattern fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is "big hit" in order of the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined in advance, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, determination is performed using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, random number values for variation pattern type determination are provided, and these variation pattern types are determined. First determine the type of fluctuation pattern from the random number value of the variable, and then execute the fluctuation from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type It is also possible to determine the turn.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-7, the form is exemplified in which the contents of the fluctuation (the contents of presentation) are determined in advance for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is limited thereto However, the contents of the variation (content of the effect) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same depending on the set value being set. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 of normal reach loss, when the set value being set is 1, it is regarded as a fluctuation pattern that becomes normal reach loss, and when the set value being set is 2, pseudo sequential effect As a variation pattern which is executed twice and becomes a non-reach loss, when the set value set is 3, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times to be a variation pattern which becomes a super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control, various table data and the like used to control the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-8 and 20-9, etc., prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11 in the ROM 101, and variation patterns of each symbol in the variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol The fluctuation pattern table etc. which store two or more kinds of fluctuation patterns which become are stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), Display result judgment table (setting value 3) shown in -8 (C), jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in Fig. 20-9 (A), jackpot type judgment shown in Fig. 20-9 (B) In addition to the small hit classification determination table shown in the table (second special symbol) and FIG. 20-9 (C), the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), the lost fluctuation pattern A judgment table (not shown), a common drawing display result judgment table (not shown), a common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to change the winning probability (out-rolling rate) of the big hit and the small hit according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (wining probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability (outfall rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed It has become. The set value is composed of three steps of 1 to 3. The highest withdrawal rate is 1; the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the withdrawal rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the degree of advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 20-8A to 20C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR 1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of fluctuation indication, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-8 (A), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variation indication If it is determined that the jackpot wins a big hit with a probability (1/99) that is higher than the setting value is “2” or “3”, a part of these judgment values will correspond to a small hit By being set as the determination value to be set, the small hit is won with a probability (1/50) higher than the case where the set value is “2” or “3”. Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even in the case of being subject to variable display, it wins a big hit with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values are By being set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, the small hit is won with a higher probability (100/200) than in the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), when using the display result judgment table corresponding to setting value 2, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". The winning value is a big hit with a probability (1/150) lower than that in a certain case, and a part of these determination values is set as a determination value corresponding to a small hit, so that the set value is "1". It is designed to win a small hit with a lower probability (1/99) than in the case. Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even in the case of being subject to variable display, it wins a big hit with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values are By being set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, it has a higher probability than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the same probability as when the set value is "1". It is designed to win a small hit at (100/200).

  As shown in FIG. 20-8 (C), when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first when using the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value 1, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is set. However, the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not set, therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, when the set value is "1", "2" Wins a big hit with a lower probability (1/200) but does not win a small hit (wining probability: 0). Also, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol Even in the case of being subject to variable display, it wins a big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and half of these judgment values are By being set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, it has a higher probability than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value is “1” or “2”. It is supposed to win a small hit with the same probability (100/200) as in the case.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-8A to 20C. If it agrees with the hit judgment value, it decides to make a big hit (big hit A to big hit C) for the special symbol. Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-8 (A) to (C), it is determined to be a small hit regarding the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit and the probability (percentage) of becoming a small hit. In addition, to decide whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, to decide whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether to control to a small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C, the winning probability of the small hit in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second is all the same. However, the winning probability of the small hit may be lowered in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is lowered in the order of the setting values 1, 2 and 3, but the same as the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second Alternatively, the same winning probability may be set for all setting values.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20-8A to 20C. A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol regardless of the fluctuation special view designation buffer and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The common table may be used for the determination, and the small hit determination may be performed using separate tables for the first and second variation special-characteristic designation buffers.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 20-8C, other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit The judgment value of is not set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit was not to be elected, but a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit corresponds to the small hit It may be set as a judgment value and a small hit may be won. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hitting probability differs according to the set value set includes that the small hitting probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and pachinko gaming machines The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  20-9 (A) and (B) are explanatory views showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among these, FIG. 20-9 (A) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) In the case of Also, FIG. 20-9 (B) determines the jackpot type using the suspension storage based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) It is a table of cases.

  The jackpot type determination table is one of the jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number for determining the jackpot type (MR2) when it is judged that the variable display result is to be the jackpot symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine the

  20-9 (C) is an explanatory view showing a small hitting type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small hit type judgment table is based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type judgment when the variable display result is judged to be a small hit symbol, the small hit type is a small hit A or a small hit B. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit D is executed If the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, if V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type big hit E is executed It is supposed to be That is, the big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit types determined by the random number value MR2 for the hit type determination extracted at the start winning, but the game ball during the small hit game of any of the small hits A and B Is a jackpot type determined by whether or not it has passed the third count switch 109SG024B.

  Here, the big hit type in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20-10. In the present embodiment, as the big hit type, the big hit A and the big hit D with which time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. A big hit B, a big hit C and a big hit E are set in which time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. That is, among the big hits A to big hits E, the big hits C and E are regarded as the most advantageous big hits for the player, and the big hits A and D are considered the most disadvantageous big hits for the player. Also, since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is considered to be a small hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among the big hit A to big hit E, the big hit A is a big hit repeated five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the first big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. Also, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot A, time saving control is not executed.

  The jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit B, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed twenty times or until a special hit game is executed twenty times, a big hit occurs again.

  The jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit C, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is executed 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  The big hit D is a big hit repeated four times (so-called four rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state of big hit D.

  The big hit E is a big hit repeated 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) of changing the second big winning opening to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit E, time saving control is executed until a special hit game is executed 100 times or until a special hit game is played 100 times until a big hit occurs again.

  In addition, big hit D and big hit E make the big winning opening of opening object 2nd big winning opening 109SG712, but this invention is not limited to this, big winning opening of opening target of big hit D and big hit E May be the first big winning opening. That is, for the big hit D and the big hit E, the second big winning opening 109SG 712 is opened for the small hitting game, and the second big winning opening 109SG 712 as the big hitting game based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hitting game. Instead, you can open the first big winning opening.

  In the time saving state, the probability of "per common" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur because a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the game ball winning a V during a small hit game. It becomes a so-called continuous state which is likely to occur continuously without intervention.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 20 times, a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, The rate at which the ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the gaming ball wins V during 20 special-figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit C and big hit E, since the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, a small hit occurs during the special figure game of 100 times. The rate at which the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B (the rate at which the game ball wins V and a big hit occurs during the special figure game of 100 times) is set to approximately 100%.

  In the present embodiment, five types of big hit A to big hit E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more types of big hit types may be provided, Also, four or less types may be provided.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, within the range 0 to 299 of the MR2 determination value, 0 to 49 are assigned to the big hit A, 50 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 149 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, the ratio for determining the big hit B or the big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is low in the order of set values 1, 2, 3 I am trying to be

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, within the range 0 to 299 of the MR2 determination values , 0 to 29 are assigned to the big hit A, 30 to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 69 within the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 in the range 0 to 299 of the MR2 judgment values are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  In this manner, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio for determining the big hit B, C for which time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is the big hit in the special symbol game of the first special symbol. Is higher than when it occurs, and becomes lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-9 (A) and 20-9 (B), when the set value set is 1, the big hit type is determined to be big hit C. The ratio is the highest, and then the ratio determined to be the big hit B is high, and the ratio determined to be the big hit A is the lowest (big hit classification ratio at the setting value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). Also, when the set value set is 2, the determination rate is the highest for the big hit type B. Then the rate for determining the big hit A is high, and the percentage determined for the big hit C is the lowest. Big hit classification decision ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Furthermore, when the set value set is 3, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot A is the highest, then the rate at which the jackpot B is determined is the highest, and the rate at which the jackpot C is determined is the lowest. There is a big hit type determination ratio at the setting value 3: big hit A> big hit B> big hit C).

  In this embodiment, according to the set value set, the form is determined in which the big hit type when the variation display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be one or more jackpot types not determined among the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C depending on the set values set. That is, depending on the set value being set, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may differ by not determining any one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%) or 100% of the specific jackpot types. It is included to determine in proportions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), in the small hitting type determination table, when the set value is “1”, 0 to 99 within the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR 2 is small. It is assigned to the hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 149 within the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR 2 is assigned to the small hit A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. There is. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 is assigned to the small hit A, and 200 to 299 is assigned to the small hit B. There is.

  Thus, when a V winning big hit occurs during a small hit game, the ratio for determining a big hit E in which the number of special figure games for which time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 times is 20 times It is higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D, and lower in the order of the setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (C), when the set value set is 1, the ratio of small hit B to small hit B is higher than that of small hit A as the small hit type. By being determined, the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V prize during the small hit game is higher than the rate at which the big hit D is determined (V in the setting value 1 Big hit classification decision ratio by winning: Big hit E> Big hit D). In addition, when the set value which is set is 2, by the small hitting A and the small hitting B being decided with the same ratio as the small hitting classification, V winning a prize occurs in the small hitting game The ratio that the big hit type is determined to be the big hit D and the percentage that is determined to be the big hit E are equal (based on the big hit type determination rate by V winning in setting value 2: big hit E = big hit D). Furthermore, if the set value set is 3, the small hit A is determined at a higher rate than the small hit B as the small hit type, based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game. The rate at which the big hit type is determined to be the big hit D is higher than the rate at which the big hit E is determined (the big hit type determination rate by the V winning in the setting value 1: big hit D> big hit E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variation display result is the big hit according to the set value set, and the determination ratio of the big hit type when the V winning is generated are different. That is, the type of the small hit gaming state controlled according to the set value set changes, and the type of the big hit gaming state controlled when the V winning is generated may change. , Has become able to improve the game interest.

  In the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the small hitting type differs according to the set value being set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value being set, Among the small hits A and the small hits B, there may be small hits that are not determined. That is, in order for the determination ratio of the small hit type to be different according to the set value being set, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode is shown in which the small hit type is determined using the common small hit type determination table regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variation feature is the first feature or the second feature. When the small hit type is determined at a different ratio according to the variation special figure, there may be small hit types not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the variation special figure. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the fluctuation special figure, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type It is also included to make decisions at a rate of 100%.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit type and the small hit type are determined using the MR2 which is a random number value for the big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, the big hit type and the small hit type At least one of the hit types may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the smaller the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability increase, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type and the jackpot type). The small hit B is easily determined, etc.) but the present invention is not limited to this, and the larger the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. You may do so.

  Also, in the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-10 to 20-12 described later, the game Although the nature itself exemplifies a form that does not change, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game property may change according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the gaming property (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal status is 1/320 and the probability status is 65% If the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot is based on the gaming ball passing the third count switch 109SG024B during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end to a definite change state, according to the fluctuation special figure, it is a game characteristic (so-called V positive change type) where the ratio that the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B during big hit game is different, pachinko game If the setting value set in the machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base (during time reduction control) is played There may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the third count switch 109SG024B. Furthermore, although the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3 in the game property, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than the case where the setting values are any of 1 to 3 A setting in which the number of award balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the case where the game property is changed in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the case of the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch 109SG024B is used as an effect switch (a predetermined effect is executed each time the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B If the setting value is 2 or 3, the third count switch 109SG024B is used as a gaming switch (a game state is changed positively or not based on the fact that the game ball passes the third count switch 109SG024B). You may use as a switch for controlling to a big hit game state.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hit used when the variation display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, and the variation display result as "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and the loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost” ing.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit, each fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-11 (A) and 20-11 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table is a jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (jackpot A used when the jackpot type is jackpot A). And a variation pattern determination table (for big hit B, big hit C) to be used when the big hit type is big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit change pattern determination tables (big hit) The fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) for A) and big hit, the fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit For each fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), the position is within the range that can be taken by random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. A fixed random number is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 20-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 0 in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Up to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), and up to 301 to 800 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and up to 801 to 997 is super reach β It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 350 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 826 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 20-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hit (for big hit B, for big hit C), when the set value is “1”, within the range of 0 to 997 of the decision value of MR3. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), 351 to 997 are It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, within 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value range, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 within the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR 3 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB 1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 The super reach α big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) is assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-3).

  As described above, when the big hit A is won in the special view game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3) It is designed to be higher than the set value and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the ratio determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit It is higher than the ratio, and lower in the order of setting values 1, 2, and 3.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is "big hit A" in the present embodiment. In the case where the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may say that “big hit B” or “big hit C” will be made. Can increase your sense of expectation.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is a decision value within the range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, MR 3 is used regardless of whether the set value is “1”, “2”, or “3”. Of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hitting fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a variation pattern of small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern of 2 or more is provided as a variation pattern of small hits, The variation patterns of the small hitting may be determined at different rates from the plurality of variation patterns with the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, there is a variation pattern determination table A for loss which is used when the number of holding memories is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not implemented for time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D which are used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the change pattern determination table A for loss, the change pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the change pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the change pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the β loss.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (A), when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table for loss (for the low base middle total hold number of 1 or less), the MR3 determination value is Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 〜900 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 90901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 400 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 401 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 450 within the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 451 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the super reach fluctuation in which the total number of pending memories corresponds to 2 to 4 A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3) ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (B), when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table B for loss (for the low base middle total hold number for 2 to 4), the judgment value of MR 3 Within the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), The range from 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the range from 901 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 450 within the range of 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 451 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 500 within the range of 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 501 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss of shortening (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8, fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super reach A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3) ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when the set value is “1” in the change pattern determination table for loss (for 5 or more low base / middle total pending storages), the MR3 determination value is Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 〜900 is assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 90901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 within the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 501 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 551 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss of shortening (PA1-4) corresponding to time-shortening control, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss ( PA2-2) A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range which can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment with respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss.

  As shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), when the set value is “1” in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss (for high base, medium), within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 determination value, 0 to 450 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α It is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 0 to 500 within the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 501 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 550 within the range 0 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value is assigned to the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach loss, and 551 to 700 The fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, and 701 to 900 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation patterns of 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss fluctuation pattern (PA PA2-3) is assigned.

  As described above, when the change pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach change pattern or the normal reach change pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach change pattern, and the setting values 1, 2, It becomes lower in the order of 3. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, among the judgment values, the fluctuation patterns of super reach α loss and the fluctuation values of super reach α and 901 to 997 are super reach β loss regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table. If the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each, that is, if the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the set value set, so the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the rendering effect from being reduced by the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  The “common determination ratio” in the present embodiment means that the determination ratio is the same for different setting values, in addition to the one for which the determination ratio is completely the same for different setting values (this embodiment). For example, among the set values 1 to 3, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach differs by about 1%.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the variation display result is a loss, an example is illustrated in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value set, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value set. Also, only the determination rates of the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns may be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value set. Although the present embodiment exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value for which is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the change display result is lost, the change pattern of the super reach α loss is The determination ratio of either or only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, both of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss regardless of the set value set. Although the present embodiment exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value for which is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is set even when the variable display result is a big hit Regardless, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different according to the set value set, but it is set. Among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns, there may be one or more variation patterns that can not be determined, depending on the set value. In other words, that the variation pattern determination ratio differs according to the set value that has been set, that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or that a particular variation pattern is 100% It is also included to determine the ratio of

  As shown in FIG. 20-12, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the fluctuation pattern (PA1) is further reduced. The variation time is shorter in the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) than in 2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach losing variation pattern is determined with a short variation time, so that the pending storage is easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 When start winning is achieved, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting winning without holding memory, and when the number of holding memories decreases, fluctuation pattern of non-reach lose without long shortening of fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), the time for the variable display becomes long, and it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest of the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-12A to 20-12C, the variation pattern is determined using different loss variation pattern determination tables according to the total number of pending storages. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storage in the special symbol to be varied (for example, the first special symbol is suspended when executing the first special symbol variation display) The variation pattern may be determined using different loss variation pattern determination tables according to the number of memories and the number of pending storages of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  In addition, in each of the variation pattern determination tables for loss according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach loss (PA 2-2 if the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value from 1 to 3). And PA2-3) have the same range of random numbers. However, since the big hit probability and the lost probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the fluctuation display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss) The appearance rate of the) differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the rate at which the variable display is executed with the change pattern of the super reach loss differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited thereto. Is not limited to the above, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and loss probability for each setting value, the fluctuation display is the same ratio regardless of the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the variation pattern of the super reach loss It may be performed.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (eg, a special map process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 20-13, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. It is done. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 20-13 includes a first special view hold storage unit 109SG151A, a second special view hold storage unit 109SG151B, a common view hold storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155.

  The first special view reserve storage unit 109SG151A, the game ball passes (enter) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and although the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred, it has not been started yet The reserve data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 109SG151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening, and the first starting condition in passing (entering) the gaming balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 109SG 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  In the second special view reserve storage unit 109SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second start winning) occurs, it has not been started yet The reserve data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 109SG151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, the second start condition of passing (enter) the game balls The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game (special view display (special view display It becomes reservation information which makes it possible to determine whether or not to be a big hit based on the result).

  The game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball having passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the second start winning port. The common hold storage unit may store the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning combination in association with the hold number. In this case, the start information may be included in the hold information indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening has passed (entered) in the hold information, and may be stored in association with the hold number. .

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 109SG 151C stores the holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 109SG041 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 109SG151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the game ball passes the passage gate 109SG041. For example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 109SG 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 109SG 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG 154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numeric data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 109SG 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 20-2 includes various input ports for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various types of devices outside the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmitting a signal.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the effect control board 12 has a CPU 120 for effect control that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the CPU 120 for effect control. The RAM 122 for providing the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the like, and the effect control CPU 120 independently update the numerical data indicating the random value. A random number circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating LED data to the lamp control board 14 is connected.

  In addition, also on the side of the effect control board 12, similarly to the main board 11, for example, random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the effect model, etc.) The effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used, the display screen to be displayed in the notification of various errors (abnormality), the error notification patterns such as the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the output sound are stored There is. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 20-2 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting unit can update the state according to, for example, an effect operation state such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or an effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of the plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, a first special view start winning buffer for performing a hold display in first hold storage display area 109SG005D in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit, and a hold in second hold storage display area 109SG005U A second special view start winning buffer for displaying is set. A storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special view reserve storage in the first special view start winning buffer The second special view start winning buffer is provided with storage areas (buffer numbers “1” to “4” corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages of the second special view pending storage. An area corresponding to “.” Is provided. The data of these start winning combination buffers are effect control to be described later according to the reception of the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning combination designation command and the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command. In the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U, based on the updated data in the start winning buffer, which is updated in the hold effect processing (S72, see FIG. 20-26) in the process processing. Pending display is updated.

  Specifically, when the first starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the first starting winning opening, a round white display is displayed on the holding display in the first holding storage display area 109SG005D. Is newly added, but when the first change start command is received based on the start of the change of the first special drawing, the topmost display among the hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D ( The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the first-time start-up winning storage) is erased and the other round white displays shift (move) in a predetermined direction (for example, left direction). Do. Similarly, when the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received based on the start winning to the second starting winning opening, a round white display is newly displayed on the holding display in the second holding storage display area 109SG005U. When the second fluctuation start command is received based on the fact that the second special drawing is newly started to be added, the topmost display (the most The hold display is updated so that the round white display of the start storage) is erased and the other round white display shifts (moves) in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction).

  Here, the counting of gaming balls and the display of the feature ratio etc. on the main substrate 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

  The main substrate 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning in the first start hole (hedge), the number of winning balls by winning in the second start winning hole (electric chew), the first big win The number of winning balls by winning in the mouth and the second big winning opening (attacker), the total number of winning balls are input, the number of firing balls is counted, and the display monitor 109SG029 2Rate ratio (%) which is the ratio of winning balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls and the first by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls The ratio (%) which is the ratio of the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker), the base (%) which is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls hit It is supposed to be displayed. The consecutive ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls (the number of consecutive winning characters obtained as described below) due to the winnings to the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) in the total number of winning balls. The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) in the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker) ( It is a ratio that the following character acquisition ball number occupies. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls played to the total number of balls. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is determined by the number of winning balls by winning on the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the winning on the second starting winning opening (electric chew) Prize balls from the winning balls (1st starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the winning balls, and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the 1st big winning a prize opening and the 2nd big winning a prize mouth (attacker) and the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth (electric thu) are the variable winning a prize, the passing possible width of the game ball fluctuates, winning of the game ball It is a feature whose assumed percentage changes. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) is a fixed winning combination, and the game The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed feature.

  As a tabulation and calculation method of information on winnings in games, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 for the consecutive ratio and the winning ratio. (General prize ball number), The number of prize balls obtained by winning in the second start winning hole (electric chew) Normal electric conductor prize ball number (electric chew prize ball number), 1st big winning hole and 2nd big winning hole (Attacker) The special electric circuit prize ball number (attacker prize ball number), which is the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the attacker, is counted. The total is regarded as one set, and 10 sets, that is, a ratio (%) for 60000, and a ratio (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls number) by winning in the 1st starting opening (Heso) and general winning opening (Sode) to be counted, the ordinary electric service prize ball number (electric chew award ball number), the special electric duty The number of award balls (the number of attackers) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set There is. That is, a considerable number (for example, several bytes) of storage for 11 sets of 6,000 sets is stored, and it is possible to calculate a running ratio (%) and a playing ratio (%) of their totals. In addition, with regard to the base, the number of game balls hit against the number of 60000 winning balls is counted. The count is regarded as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 winning balls to the number of game balls hit is calculated.

  The display monitor 109 SG 029 is a base calculated based on a continuous ratio (%), a duty ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), a duty ratio (%), and a winning ratio of 60,000 last time The base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the base 1 (%) and the last 60000 winning balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, the six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display everything, but the number of winning balls from the winning on the first starting opening (Heso) and the winning on the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted up as the game progresses The number of winning balls by the winnings to the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the number of winning balls won after displaying a ratio of 6,000 (%) is reflected in the ratio of 0000 (%) displayed after that, 6,000 will be displayed. Discrepancies may occur between the ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) for 60000. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning in the first starting opening (Heso), the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric Chu), winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) If there is a prize ball number and a prize ball total number by entering and tabulation is performed at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a ratio (%) for 6,000 pieces), such a discrepancy may occur. It can prevent.

  In addition, the storage area in which the information on the winning of the game in the present embodiment is stored is provided for each set value, and the general winning prize ball, the first starting mouth prize ball, the ordinary electric circuit winning ball, the special electric combination The winning balls, the winning ball totals, and the hit totals are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) according to the set values set. For this reason, the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base in the present embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) The method of calculating the character ratio (combination ratio (%)) in the case where the number of character acquisition balls is 42000 which is the sum of the number of winning balls and the number of prizes obtained by In the following description, the total winning ball number means the total cumulative number of gaming media (winning balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the prize winning ball number refers to the total number of game media paid out by the game media winning in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the continuous winning thing winning ball number refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by the game media winning the attacker. The total hit number refers to the total number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of winning balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the coupling ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the duty ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be obtained by the following equation (3).
Reciprocal ratio = [continuous character acquisition ball number / total acquisition number] x 100 (1)
Role ratio = [(continuous character acquisition ball number + character acquisition ball number) / total acquisition number] × 100 ... (2)
Base = [60000 (total number of winning balls) / total hit number] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of winning balls is 60000 and the number of obtained balls is 42000, the character ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three decimal places rounded off) by dividing 42000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not perform the calculation below the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of balls obtained by the bonus is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. And this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. In other words, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of winning balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. And divide 42000 by 600. This gives 70 as the quotient. From 70 obtained here, the character ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, calculation results up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, in order to obtain an operation result up to three decimal places, division by 1000 may be performed.

  Although the total number of winning balls is 60000 in the above-described example, a 3-byte area is provided as a region for storing the total number of winning balls in order to calculate the feature ratio of a long period. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA 60h in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A 410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the bonus item acquisition ball number as well.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error is + 1% when the total number of winning balls and the number of obtained balls are 10 times. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the feature ratio is extended, and approximates to the original value.

  Further, the substrate case 109SG201 is formed of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 109SG029 can be viewed. The substrate case 109SG201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main substrate 11 is inserted and a heat radiation hole for releasing the heat of the electrical component of the main substrate 11. The display monitor 109SG029 provided on the main substrate 11 is disposed at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is not blocked by the heat radiation holes. Here, “directly on the front” means directly on the main substrate 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the employee or the like who is trying to visually recognize the main substrate 11 and the main substrate 11. Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only calculate values of up to 2 bytes. Thus, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method will be described in which the second calculation method is simplified. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded off with respect to 00EA 60h of the total number of prize balls so that calculation with the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is discarded, and the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation is calculated.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. Based on 78 determined here, the character ratio is determined as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area where information on game winnings is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the bonus ball acquisition ball number is larger than the stored value of the total ball number, or the character Initialization of the storage area where information on winning of the game is stored when an event that can not occur as a situation is detected, for example, when the value of the continuous winning object winning ball number is larger than the value of the winning ball number You may process. In addition, an error display or a warning display may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or the error processing or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the error display or the warning display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  In the calculation of the duty ratio (%), for example, assuming that the total number of obtained balls is 34,321 and the number of obtained balls is 19876, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34,321 against 19876 as a divisor. 19876/34321 = 0.57912 and so on, which is calculated to be about 57.9% of the part ratio (%). In the case of performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with the decimal point must be avoided, so the following calculation formula is used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34,321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded off, resulting in 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the decimal part is rounded off, it is calculated to be 57% (%) and displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. In this example, it is an error on the display from the value calculated by the correct calculation There will be no

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of obtained objects are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when converted to the calculation by the gaming control microcomputer 100, it becomes an error of + 0.3% at 32799/327 = 100.3%. For example, when the decimal point is rounded down and the calculation is performed, the correct value is 69.9%, and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%. Although an error of% is considered to be displayed, the ratio (%) (or a ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error also on the display of an error of 1%.

  Further, in the case of using the above calculation method, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation can not be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Furthermore, the error is gradually increased when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in an even larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. For this reason, the display ratio (%) and the link ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired spheres (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter. Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that the error may be large, by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, blinking the displayed value, or the like.

  Further, the display monitor 109SG029 displays the ratio (%), the ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds) Display. In this case, for example, while displaying a part ratio (%) for 5 seconds, a phenomenon occurs that a game medium is newly awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the ratio calculated according to it is repeated ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of%), there is a possibility that the value of the part ratio (%) and the value of the continuous part (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable to sequentially display values calculated and calculated within the same interrupt as the duty ratio (%) and the coupling ratio (%).

  Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when 2 segments are provided), the display can not be made 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. Although the display monitor 109SG029 shown in FIG. 20-15 (A) is capable of displaying numerical values in the lower two digits, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, numerical values may be displayed in part of the upper two digits.

  In the present embodiment, a sensor is provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew to detect that the game medium has won, and the number of balls is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection result is obtained using a sensor provided after the discharge path where the gaming media winning the attacker and the gaming media winning the electric cho are discharged join. It is also possible to count the feature acquisition ball number and the continuous feature acquisition ball number on the basis of.

  Hereinafter, the display of the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 1). On the back side of the game board 2, besides the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the number of winnings of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) is counted by the large winning number counter, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first large winning number counter that counts the number of winnings to the first large winning opening and the second large winning number counter that counting the number of winnings to the second large winning opening are separately provided, The number of winnings for the first large winning opening and the number of winnings for the second large winning opening may be separately counted, and these respective numbers of winnings may be summed to obtain the number of winnings for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. The second starting winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second starting opening switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A.

  A clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main substrate 11. The clear switch is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like can not easily operate. By operating the clear switch, the data used for the ratio and the duty ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch operated when the calculation of the ratio or the ratio can not be reperformed, for example, when there is a failure in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio. For this reason, it is a switch which does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal coupling ratio and a combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to the data clear.

  As described above, the RTC 106 is provided on the main substrate 11, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by performing initial setting, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 is capable of measuring the operating time of the game arcade.

  The main substrate 11 is accommodated in a substrate case 109SG201. A caulking pin not shown is attached to the substrate case 109SG201. By providing the caulking pins, the main substrate 11 is completely sealed in the substrate case 109SG 201, and an illegal act on the main substrate 11 is prevented. The substrate case 109SG201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

  In addition, the display monitor 109SG029 is provided on the main substrate 11. In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the substrate case 109SG201 for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The sealing seal is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 109SG201. The sealing seal is disposed at a position away from the main substrate 11, and is disposed at a position different from a position where the visibility of the display monitor 109SG029 is interrupted, such as directly in front of the display monitor 109SG029. Thus, the display monitor 109SG029 is disposed at a position not hidden by the seal seal.

  The display monitor 109SG029 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is configured by seven segments each including seven segments that draw the character of "8" and dots disposed at the lower right of the seven segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 20-15 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. The first display portion 29A of the first digit displays set values (1-3) tabulated, and the second display portion 29B of the second digit and the third display portion 29C of the third digit display the aggregation period The numerical values are displayed as percentages in the fourth display unit 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E of the fifth digit. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term duty ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total ratio of cumulative totals is displayed, and in display No. 4, the ratio of total cumulative totals is displayed. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 winning balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately previous 60000 winning balls is displayed Be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for which the total cumulative total is determined means a total period after starting calculation of the ratio, combination ratio, or total ratio after resetting the calculation of the combination ratio or ratio once.

  In the above-mentioned example, although a continuation ratio, a part ratio, and a base are calculated irrespective of a game state, you may calculate in consideration of a game state. For example, the ratio may be a ratio of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state in the total number of winning balls. In addition, as the ratio of winning balls by winning to the second starting winning opening during high base state and winning balls by winning to big winning opening during the big hit gaming state among the winning balls total number It is also good. Also, the bases may be separately calculated in the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term linkage ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and the second combination of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. In addition, when the short-term linkage ratio of display No1 is displayed, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the short-term linkage ratio as a percentage (% display), and the short-term part ratio of display No2 is displayed In the case of being displayed, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the short-term winning ratio in percentage (in%).

  When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total display link ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the ratio is displayed, the total display combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E.

  Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, and the base 2 of display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the display 29B and the third display 29C. Further, when the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total display link ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative duty ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  The main substrate 11 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening (attacker), a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a first general winning opening in calculating the combination ratio, the winning ratio and the base. The number of game balls entering the 4th general winning opening and the number of game balls discharged from the discharge port are counted. In the main processing, the CPU 103 performs the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, and the first general winning port switch 109SG026A to the fourth general A switch process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 109SG026D and the discharge port switch 109SG070.

  In this switch process, it is specified to which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, When the detection signal is output from the first count switch 109SG023 and the second count switch 109SG024A, the value of the large winning number counter is added. If a detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch 109SG026C, the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, the first general winning number counter, Second general winning number counter, third general winning number counter, fourth general winning number When the detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 109SG070, the number of game balls entering each entry area is added by adding the value of the hit number counter (to each winning opening). Count the number of winning game balls. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the steps for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area are executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing). By including it in the switch process, it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the execution program. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening based on the counted number of gaming balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls paid out by one winning for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of winning balls by the winning of the gaming balls is predetermined for each winning opening.

  The number of winning balls per winning opening classified here is, as shown in FIG. 20-16, the winning balls for the general winning opening winning balls (first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening (Sode)). ), 1st start winning prize winning ball (prising ball by winning in the first starting winning hole (heso)), ordinary electric pole winning ball (prising ball by winning in electric chew), special electric pole winning ball (to attackers) The number of prize balls by the prize ball). In addition, the RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls and the number of game balls hit. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game ball wins to the general winning opening and the number of game ball wins to the first starting opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting opening The number of winning game balls may be collected and counted. Also, although the number of prize balls for the general winning prize ball and the number of prize balls for the first starting mouth ball are calculated separately, the number of prize balls for the general winning mouth ball and the number of first winning mouth balls The number of winning balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of prize balls obtained by winning into each winning opening for every 6,000 number of prize balls. Thus, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer is provided with a 0-th storage area consisting of a maximum 2-byte counter storing the number of winning balls by winning on each winning opening for every 6,000 winning balls. The number of winning balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added to the zeroth storage area. Eleven storage areas of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store data of 256 × 256 = 65536, and up to 6000 data can be stored with room.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with storage areas for the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total sum for each winning opening. There is. The storage area for 10 sets of totals and total totals is configured with a maximum of 3 bytes of counter, so it can store 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data, and up to 60000 data with a margin. It can be stored.

  Also, in the RAM 102, a continuous ratio storage area for storing 10 combinations and total cumulative ratio and combination ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2) and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1) And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and combination ratio of 10 sets and total cumulative total by the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls to 10 sets and total cumulative total winning openings, 10 sets equivalent And storing the combination ratio of the total accumulation and the combination ratio in a combination ratio storage area. The combination ratio storage area storing 10 combinations and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination ratio are each configured by a maximum of 1 byte counter. For example, in the case of storing the ratio and combination of 10 sets and the total total as integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1-byte counter with a margin.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11 calculates a base for 10 sets by the number of hits for the number of game balls paid to each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) The base storage area stores a base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of game balls awarded to each winning opening for 10 sets of. For example, when storing base 1 and base 2 in integers, they can be stored with a maximum of 1 byte counter with allowance.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 20-17 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 20-17, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. Hereinafter, Of the same, 0000H to 2FBFH (2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies this ROM area and reads data from the ROM 101. Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and registers to the register through this register area. Write data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC 0H to FFFFH) are non-use areas.

  The RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is a RAM control area, a nonuse area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. It consists of The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area includes instruction data (op code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplemental data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. Data for the configured control program (sometimes referred to simply as control program data) is temporarily stored, and in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, reference data referred to by the above control program (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) are temporarily stored.

  Further, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data used for displaying the coupling ratio and the duty ratio is temporarily stored. For example, in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area, a storage area for storing the total cumulative total of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio combination storage area for the total total are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls per winning opening (10 sets A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a continuous ratio storage area for 10 sets are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other is stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each data described above (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) If the management data) is data of a byte number (for example, 2 bytes) exceeding 1 byte, the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  In addition, the main substrate 11 controls the display monitor 109SG029 to display the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base. Here, the main substrate 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 20-19 (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a character ratio display apparatus. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), when the display on the display monitor 109SG029 is started, first, the short-term link ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the short-term continuous ratio display of Display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-1), “1” which is the set value is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. The character of is displayed, and the character of "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the short-term continuous ratio. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display No. 1 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term winning ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the short-term-combination ratio display of display No 2, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-2), “1” which is a set value is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B. The character of is displayed, and the character of "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, a short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term winning ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  If the display of display No 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative link ratio of display No 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-3), “1”, which is the set value, is displayed on the first display portion 29A in the display of the total cumulative link ratio of display No. 3, and “A” is displayed on the second display portion 29B. The character of “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, the total cumulative link ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative link ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  If the display No. 3 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative duty ratio of display No 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-4), “1”, which is the set value, is displayed on the first display portion 29A in the display of the total-cum-combination ratio of display No. The character of “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. In addition, a total cumulative winning combination is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative winning ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of Display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, Base 1 of Display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-5), “1” which is a set value is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and “b” is displayed on the second display portion 29B. The characters are displayed, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Further, on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the base 1 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display of the display No 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6). The display of base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In display of base 2 of display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-6), “1” which is a set value is displayed on the first display portion 29A, and “b” is displayed on the second display portion 29B. The characters are displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Further, on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  When the display No. 5 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20-19 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 is sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as the color of the display, only the short-term link ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. As described above, the display monitor 109SG029 switches and displays the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 20-19 (A) to 29-19 (C), the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are indicated as Based on the operation of the display changeover switch 109SG030, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation combination ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1, the display of the base 2 and the setting value of “2” when the set value is “1” In the case of “1”, “short-term ratio”, “short-term ratio”, “total cumulative ratio”, “total cumulative ratio”, “base 1”, “base 2” indication, setting value “3” It is possible to sequentially change the display of ratio, total cumulative combination, base 1 and base 2. When the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

  In addition, when the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation continuous ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “2”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  Then, when the display changeover switch 109SG030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “3”, 1) The numerical value displayed on the display portion 29A is updated to “1”, and the short-term run ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The numerical values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In the display monitor 109SG029 according to the present embodiment, a mode capable of displaying the ratio, the duty ratio, and the base in each set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this and a display monitor In 109SG029, it is possible to display only one numerical value or any two numerical values among the ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which a ratio, a combination, and a base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the combination, the combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 109SG029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the ratio, the duty ratio, or the base. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the short-term connection ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 109SG029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total-accumulation combination ratio, the total-cum-combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the short-term connection ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are indicated in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term connection ratios, It may be displayed in the same color, which is different from the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative ratio.

  In the main substrate 11, when the total prize sphere of the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000 which is a predetermined capacity, the storage of the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the storage area of the sum total and the total accumulation for 10 sets, the combination ratio storage area storing the combination ratio of 10 sets and the total accumulation, and the transmission ratio is respectively updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the zeroth storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. In addition, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-20, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87” respectively. Suppose that it is "66" "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6,000, the number of prize balls of the general prize winning prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is “27”, “81” “ Update to "120" "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Further, the number of winning balls in the 0 th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of winning balls in the 10 th storage area is erased.

  When the number of winning balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the stored number of winning balls may be once erased and then a new number of winning balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new winning number may be stored by overwriting the stored winning number.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-21, the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S8) in the aforementioned game control main process (see FIG. 3). It is determined whether the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11). If the lock switch 109SG051 is ON (step 109SGSa11; Yes), it is determined whether the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12). If the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON (step 109SGSa12; Yes), the setting change process (step 109SGSa13) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 109SGSa14.

  By executing the setting change process (step 109 SGSa 13), the CPU 103 receives the operation of the setting change switch 109 SG 052 and the lock switch 109 SG 051 and is in a state capable of changing the setting value. In the setting change process, it is possible to confirm the setting condition of the setting value on the display of the display monitor 109SG029.

  Then, after the setting change process (step 109 SGSa 13) is performed, after the step S 7 is performed, when the lock switch 109 SG 051 is OFF (step 109 SGSa 11; No), and when the door open sensor 109 SG 090 is OFF (step 109 SGSa 12; No). ) Reads the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 in step 109SGSa14, sets the read setting value as the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then executes the processing of step S10 and subsequent steps.

  In the present embodiment, when a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change process, the CPU 103 issues a command for notifying the setting value set in the effect control board 12 May be output. As described above, when the CPU 103 can output a command for notifying the set value set to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the newly set set value. Therefore, at a specific timing of the game (for example, during the variable display or at the end of the big hit game), a notification effect (for example, a confirmation notification effect for the set value 1) of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko It is possible to execute a setting value indication effect or the like that suggests the setting value of the gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode is shown in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the CPU 103 executing the setting change process, but the present invention is not limited to this. When executing the setting change process, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being performed. As described above, when the CPU 103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting change process is being executed, the effect that the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process is used for effect control. Since the CPU 120 can recognize, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, etc. It is possible to notify the surrounding area of a certain thing.

  For example, while the setting change process is being executed, characters such as "setting changing" are displayed on the black background on the image display device 5, and voices such as "setting changing" are repeatedly output from the speakers 8L and 8R, The other display (for example, effect pattern, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 may not be displayed, but these effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display Etc. may be displayed while the setting change process is being performed. Furthermore, since the variation display of the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed during the setting change processing of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol indicator Although it is not displayed at all in 20, the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of setting change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display device The symbol indicating that the setting change process is being executed at 20 or the symbol indicating a specific display result (for example, losing) may be stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, during the setting change process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 indicate that the setting change process is being executed. Although the form which displays a symbol which shows a specific display result (for example, losing) is stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of setting change processing, the 1st suspension indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the common view hold indicator 25C may be made to emit light (for example, to repeat blinking) in a mode indicating that setting change processing is being executed. Furthermore, a display (round number display) for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an instruction to the player to launch the game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area) In the case where a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these displays may emit light in a mode that indicates that the setting change processing is being performed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when the clear switch is in the on state (S3; Y), when the backup data is not stored (S4; N), or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N) In the illustrated embodiment, the lock switch 109SG051 and the door open sensor 109SG090 are determined to be ON or not (109SGSa11, 109SGSa12) or the setting change process (109SGSa13) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or if the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the power is cut off when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal or when the power is not normal. It is determined that the clear switch is in the on state, since this is a possible event when the If (S3; Y) only whether the determination (109SGSa11,109SGSa12) and or tablets switches 109SG051 or door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON, the may perform the setting change processing (109SGSa13). That is, when the backup data is not stored (S4; N) or when the backup RAM is not normal (S5; N), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be taken over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode is shown in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the CPU 103 executing the setting change process, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the display monitor 109SG029, the CPU 103 may be capable of executing a process (hereinafter, setting confirmation process) in which the setting value can not be changed. When the CPU 103 can execute the setting confirmation process as described above, the CPU 103 may output a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being performed. As described above, when the CPU 103 outputs a command for notifying the effect control board 12 that the setting confirmation process is being executed, the effect that the CPU 103 is executing the setting confirmation process is indicated. Since the CPU 120 can recognize, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed by image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, etc. It is possible to notify the surrounding area of a certain thing.

  The setting confirmation process may be performed under the condition that the lock switch 109SG051 and the door opening sensor 109SG090 are turned on after the CPU 103 executes the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 3). However, for example, during the special symbol variation display or during the big hit game, during the small hit game, when the special symbol variation display is not executed but there is a pending storage, a predetermined period after the error is detected, During the predetermined period such as waiting for the game ball to enter the big hit game start gate during payout of the prize ball (only when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with the big hit game start gate), the lock switch 109SG051 and the door are opened. The setting confirmation process may not be executed even when the open sensor 109SG090 is turned on.

  Furthermore, after the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process and displays the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, the setting value for the display monitor 109SG029 without switching the lock switch 109SG051 off. It may be possible to play the game in the state where is set.

  Next, the processing status of the setting change processing and the display mode of the display monitor 109SG029 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (A) and FIG. 20-22 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by the operation of a salesclerk of the game arcade or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 109SG029 ends. When the big winning game is open during the big hit game or the small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning hole is closed by stopping the supply of the power to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (C), when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the lock switch 109SG051 is turned on. The setting change processing is executed by the CPU 103 on condition that the door opening sensor 109SG090 is ON and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029.

  Thus, in the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 109SG052 by the store clerk of the game arcade or the like each time. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →... Each time the setting change switch 109SG052 is operated).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-22 (E), the CPU 103 detects the setting operation of the lock switch 109SG051 by the store clerk at the game arcade or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 is stored in the RAM 102. Store (update storage) in the backup area. At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 109SG029 to notify the store clerk or the like of the game arcade that a new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Also, when the pending storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the pending storage is cleared.

  In FIG. 20-22 (E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 as shown in a feature 2 (see FIGS. 20-40 to 20-46) of this embodiment described later. It may be converted into a setting concealment value, and a setting value designation command including the setting concealment value may be output to the effect control board 12. When the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the set value designation command from the CPU 103, the effect control board 12 (specification control CPU 120) identifies the set value from the set value designation command and stores the set value. You may perform the suggestion (setting value suggestion production) to suggest. When the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-22 (A) (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the special winning opening is opened again. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing based on the lock switch 109SG 051 being turned off by the operation of a game arcade clerk or the like, and can play a game, that is, the fluctuation display result, the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern The determination lottery, the payout of the winning balls, etc. become executable.

  Although the setting change process in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 in the setting change process is not the setting value that is most advantageous for the player (“1” in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous for the player. A set value ("3" in the present embodiment) may be displayed.

  When the CPU 103 having executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 20-23 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (109SGS010). Then, by executing predetermined switch processing, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, the third switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the count switch 109SG024B, the fourth count switch 109SG024C, and the discharge port switch 109SG070 is determined (109SGS011).

  Subsequently, when a game ball occurs in any of the general winning opening 109SG050A to the general winning opening 109SG050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first large winning opening, and the second large winning opening 109SG712, That is, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, the first count switch 109SG023, the second count switch 109SG024A, the first general winning opening switch 109SG026A, the second general winning opening switch 109SG026B, the third general winning opening switch When there is an input of a detection signal from the 109SG026C and the fourth general winning opening switch 109SG026D, an award ball processing (109SGS012) is performed to set the number of award balls corresponding to the prize according to each detection signal.

  Next, the CPU 103 calculates winning information processing (109SGS013) that calculates winning information such as winning ratio, reaming ratio, and base, and displays winning information such as winning ratio, reaming ratio, and base calculated by the winning information processing monitor 109SG029 The prize information display control process (109SGS014) displayed on the screen is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (109SGS015), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, payout information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (109 SGS 016).

  Subsequent to the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main substrate 11 side is executed (109SGS017) . After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (109SGS018). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball unit 109SG007, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing is executed (109SGS019). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable symbol display of the normal symbol and the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables tilting operation setting of one piece and the like.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (109SGS020). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG 155, After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the state to the off state or the like, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  In the command control process of the 109SGS020, a command for notifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display has ended. The setting value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by transmitting the information including the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, by receiving these commands from the main substrate 11, the effect control board 12 (the CPU for effect control 120) executes an effect that suggests the set values that have been set at various timings, such as during variable display or during a big hit game. May be

  FIG. 20-24 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed by 109SGS 018 shown in FIG. 20-23 as the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (109SGS021). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of 109SGS 022 to 109SGS 031 in accordance with the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152.

  In the start winning process of 109SGS021, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second start winning by the first starting opening switch 22A or the second starting opening switch 22B, and if there is a winning, the variable display result determination The random number value MR1 for the main hit, the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are extracted, and in the case of the first start winning, the first entry in the special storage reserve section 109SG151A In the case of the second start winning combination, it is stored in the top of the empty entry in the second special view reservation storage unit 109SG151B. In the start winning process, when the start win occurs, the setting for transmitting the first start opening winning designation command or the second start winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is also executed. The first starting opening winning combination designation command and the second starting opening winning selection command are output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (109SGS020).

  The special symbol normal processing of 109 SGS 022 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is displayed based on the presence / absence of pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 109SG151A or the second special view pending storage unit 109SG151B. A determination is made as to whether or not the special figure game is to be started by the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the display result determination table (refer to FIG. 20-8) according to the set value set and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the special symbol or effect symbol It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of is to be the "big hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (big hit symbol or Small hit design, lost design either) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of 109SGS 023 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern can be selected from any of a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It includes the process of deciding whether or not. Note that the fluctuation pattern is determined using any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-11 to 20-12 according to the set value and the fluctuation display result and the jackpot type set. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of 109 SGS 022 and the variation pattern setting processing of 109 SGS 023, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol and the effect symbol as the variation symbol display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the random symbol value MR1 for determining the variation display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. A process of determining the variable display mode is included.

  The special symbol variation process of 109 SGS 024 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of 109SGS024 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is decremented by 1 or 1 Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, it is progressed by a common timer A measurement of time is taken. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of 109 SGS 024 is the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B It is sufficient that the processing of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the symbol is controlled by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of 109SGS025 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG 152 is on or not, and when the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off, it is further determined whether the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG 152 is on, and the small hit flag is on. In this case, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "7". When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of 109 SGS 026 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation indication result becoming “big hit”, etc., the process to start the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and set for opening the first big winning opening Etc. are included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the first big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is "big hit A", "big hit B", or "big hit C". It is also good. As an example, regardless of the type of big hit, while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the 1st big winning a prize opening state to “29 seconds”, the opening frequency of the 1st big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit frequency which executes the round, The setting of jackpot status is performed by setting “5 times” for “big hit A”, “10 times” for “big hit B”, and “15 times” for “big hit C”. Just do it. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of 109 SGS 027 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the first big winning opening, the measured elapsed time, the number of gaming balls detected by the first count switch 109SG 023, etc. The process includes determining whether it is time to return the first big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. When the first big winning opening is returned to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG082 for the first big winning opening door 109SG 701 is executed, and the value of the special view process flag is “6 Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of 109 SGS 028 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. In this big hit end processing, waiting corresponding to a period during which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, gaming effect lamp 9, etc. The process includes a process of waiting until time elapses, and a process of performing various settings (setting of a time saving flag) for starting time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  Specifically, in the big hit end process, the type of the big hit that has been executed is specified. Then, if the specified jackpot type is “big hit A”, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0” without setting the time saving flag. When the identified big hit type is "big hit B", the time-shortening flag is set and the count initial value ("20" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit B" is set in the time reduced number counter and the special figure Update the value of the process flag to "0". When the specified jackpot type is "big hit C", the time-shortening flag is set, and the count initial value ("100" in this embodiment) corresponding to "big hit C" is set in the time-shortened number counter. Update the value of the special drawing process flag to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of 109 SGS 029 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening pre-processing, the execution of the round is started in the small hit gaming state and the second large winning opening 109SG 712 is opened based on the fact that the variable display result is "small hit", etc. The process of setting is included. At this time, based on, for example, the variable display result being "small hit", the upper limit of the period during which the second large winning opening 109SG 712 is opened is set to "1 second", and the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting the number of times of opening of the second large winning opening 109SG 712 to “one time”, it is only necessary to set the small hitting state. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "8".

  In this embodiment, in the small hit state, the number of opening times of the second large winning opening 109SG 712 is set to “one time”, and the upper limit of the period in which the second large winning opening 109SG 712 is opened is set to “1 second”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of opening times of the second large winning opening 109SG 712 in the small hit state may be two or more times, and the second large The upper limit of the period in which the winning opening 109SG 712 is in the open state may be a period other than “1 second” as long as the game ball can win in the second large winning opening 109SG 712.

  The small hit open processing of S30 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". In this small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the second big winning opening 109SG 712, the elapsed time measured, and the number of gaming balls detected by the second count switch 109SG024A, etc. Based on the process, it is determined whether it is time to return the second large winning opening 109SG 712 from the open state to the closed state. When the second big winning opening 109SG 712 is returned to the closed state, the processing of stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 109SG083 for the second big winning opening door 109SG711, etc. is executed, and then the value of the special view process flag is " Updated to 9 ".

  The small hitting end processing of 109SGS 031 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “9”. The small hit end process corresponds to a period in which ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, etc. The process includes waiting for waiting time to elapse. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 20-25 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (109 SGS 051). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (109SGS052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, when the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (109SGS053), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: 109 SGS 054). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 20-5) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (109SGS055). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the image display device 5.

  Next, the effect random number updating process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the effect random number such as the jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (109SGS056), and thereafter, the process shifts to 109SGS052.

  FIG. 20C is a flowchart of an effect control process (109SGS055) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold effect process for executing control of effects relating to a hold display or an active display (109SGS072). In the hold effect processing in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start opening winning combination designation command and the second start opening winning selection command, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or (2) It is possible to display the hold display in the active display area 109SG005F based on the update of the hold display in the hold storage display area 109SG005U and the reception of the first change start specification command and the second change start specification command. Further, in the hold effect process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first start winning effect and the second start win effect.

  In the first start winning effect, as shown in FIGS. 20-27 (A) and 20-27 (B), the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and active in the active display area 109SG005F. During the variable display in which the display is displayed, when a start winning is generated at the first start winning opening, the hold display is directed from the character image 109SGC to the display position of the new hold display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. It is an effect of moving display. In addition, the movement display of the suspension display of the first start winning presentation object is a position (the suspension in the first suspension storage display area 109SG005D determined in advance based on the number of first special view suspension storage at the start of the first startup winning effect). It ends by moving to the position determined according to the memory number.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-27 (C) and 20-27 (D), the second start winning effect is the first in the state where the number of pending storages is 0 and the variable display is not executed. This is an effect of moving and displaying an active display from the character image 109SGC to the active display area 109SG005F via the first hold storage display area 109SG005D when the start winning game occurs in the start winning combination.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the processes of 109SGS 073 to 109SGS 082 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (109SGS074).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (109SGS074): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (109SGS075).

  Process during effect symbol fluctuation (109SGS075): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (109SGS076).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (109SGS076): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern confirmation command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the change of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (109 SGS 077), the small hit display process (109 SGS 080) or the variation pattern designation command reception wait process (109 SGS 073).

  Big hit display process (109SGS077): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (109SGS078).

  During the big hit game processing (109SGS078): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (109SGS079).

  Big hit end effect processing (109 SGS 079): In the image display 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073).

  Small hit display process (109 SGS 080): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of a small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit in-game processing (109SGS081).

  Small hit in game processing (109SGS081): Control of small hit in game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect process (109SGS082).

  Small hitting end effect processing (109SGS082): In the image display 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hitting gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (109SGS073) or the big hit display process (109SGS077).

  In the present embodiment, when executing the above-mentioned first start winning effect, the first suspension storage is started by the end of the variable display and the start of a new variable display during execution of the first start winning effect. The number of pending display items displayed in the display area 109SG005D may change (decrease). In such a case, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (A) to FIG. 20-28 (E), the movement destination (stop position in the first suspension storage display area 109SG005D of the suspension display for the first start winning presentation object) After redetermining), the first start winning effect may be continued.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28 (A) to 20-28 (E), the end of the variable display and the new variable display start while the first start winning effect directed to the hold 4 display position is being executed. When the hold display displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D is shifted based on the status of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D (the number of first special view hold storages is two) If the hold display is no longer displayed at the hold 3 display position), the move destination in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D of the hold display for the first start winning presentation object is redetermined to the hold 3 display position, and then (1) It is sufficient to continue the start winning presentation.

  In addition, during specific effects that indicate that the variable display result is a big hit, such as reach effects during changes in super reach, the player can be made to pay attention to the reach effects when the first start winning effect is executed. It will be gone. Therefore, in the hold effect process according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-29 (A) and 20-29 (B), during the execution of a specific effect such as during reach effect during a change in super reach, (1) When a new start winning is generated at the start winning opening, the first holding storage display area 109SG005D is only added to display a new hold display without executing the first start winning effect. (1) It is possible to prevent the attraction of the reach effect from being reduced by the start winning effect.

(Modification 1)
In the present embodiment, the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect are executed as the appearance display in the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 20-30 (A) and FIG. 20-30 (B), when a new start winning combination occurs while the number of reserved memories is 0 and non-execution of variable display occurs, 2 The start display may be displayed as an active display in the active display area 109SH 005F without executing the start winning effect, or, as the second start effect, the hold display from the character image 109 SGC to the first hold storage display area 109 SG 005 D Directly to the active display area 109SG005F without passing through. By doing this, it is possible to shorten the period from when a new start winning is generated until the active display is displayed in the active display area 109SG005F.

  Further, although the present embodiment has illustrated the mode of displaying the white circular pending display in the first pending storage display area 109SG005D and the second pending storage display area 109SG005U, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes (for example, blue round, red round, white triangle, white square, etc.) are provided as display modes of these reserve displays, and in which display mode the reserve display is displayed In the variable display corresponding to each hold display, the hold change presentation may be made to indicate the ratio (big hit expectation) at which the variable display result is a big hit.

(Modification 2)
When the jackpot expectation is made different according to the display mode of the hold display as described above, the display mode of the hold display of the first start winning game target may be changed during the first start winning game effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-31 (A) to 20-31 (D) as the second modification, a movable body is provided on the side of the image display device 5, and the first start winning effect is being executed. The hold display is concealed from the player by placing the movable body on the movement path of the hold display. Then, changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment changes the display mode of the hold display during the first start winning effect (from the round white display to the star-shaped white color shown in FIG. 20-31 (D) Change to the display 109SG005H1) may be realized. By doing this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which display mode of the hold display of the first start winning effect object changes, so it is possible to improve the game fun.

  Further, in the second modification, the mobile display hides the hold display for the first start winning presentation object and changes the display mode of the hold display during the concealment, but the present invention is limited thereto. 20-32 (A) to FIG. 20-32 (D), the suspension display for the first start winning presentation object is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the movable body. Change the display mode of the hold display during the first start winning effect by concealing by the image (character image 109SG005G shown in FIG. 20-32 (C)) and changing the display mode of the hold display during the concealment (circle It is sufficient to realize the change from the white display of the mold to the square white display 109SG005H2 shown in FIG.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The change of the set value of may be executable during the game. In addition, when changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game, as shown in FIGS. 20-33 (A) to 20-33 (C) as a third modification, for example, first, a clerk at the game arcade Etc. After opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, the lock switch 109SG0051 is turned ON to display the setting value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor (first display section 109SG029A), and then the gaming machine When a store clerk or the like in the field operates the setting change switch 109SG052, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 109SG029A is changed.

  The store clerk or the like at the game arcade presses the lock switch 109SG051 to set the numerical value (setting value) displayed on the first display section 109SG029A as the setting value of the new pachinko gaming machine 1, and backs up the RAM 102. It may be stored in the area. In addition, after the new setting value is set, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, the special view hold storage, the general drawing hold store or the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153, Various flags and data stored in the game control counter setting unit 109SG 154, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG 155, etc. may be deleted.

  Thus, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, a pending storage in which the variable display result is a big hit is newly generated along with the change of the setting value, or the variable winning ball device 6B is newly It can be prevented that it will be released (the occurrence of a hit of a common figure) and the fluctuation display result during execution will be a big hit unreasonably. Furthermore, by clearing the game control data holding area 109SG150, the big winning opening is closed if a big hit is in progress or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed if the variable winning ball device 6B is open. Can prevent the player from getting an inappropriate profit. Furthermore, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being erased even though the new setting value is not set.

  Although the present modification 3 exemplifies a mode in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game, the present invention is not limited to this, and thus pachinko gaming in the game When setting values of the machine 1 can be changed, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of an LED, etc. are detected based on the fact that the opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is detected by a frame opening detection sensor not shown. By providing an open notification means capable of notifying that the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from being illegally changed.

  Furthermore, when the release notification means is provided as described above, it is determined whether or not hold storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, and the game control data holding area 109SG150 When the pending storage is stored, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from the case where the pending storage is not stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150. By doing this, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened to change the setting value, whether or not the pending storage is stored in the game control data holding area 109SG150 according to the notification mode of the notification means is easily performed. Since a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can recognize, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed inappropriately.

  Furthermore, in the third modification, when the opening notification means is provided as described above, whether or not there is a storage for the variable display result to be a big hit in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened. If it is determined that there is a pending storage in which the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the notification may be performed in a notification mode different from the case where it is determined that there is no pending storage in which the fluctuation display result is a big hit. By doing this, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, it becomes possible for the store clerk etc. of the game arcade to easily recognize the presence or absence of pending storage where the variable display result is a big hit, so it is set inappropriately. It is possible to prevent the value from being changed.

  Furthermore, while the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed during the game as in the third modification, and as in the second modification, the display mode of the hold display is changed from white round to white round If it is possible to change to a white triangle or quadrilateral having a higher expectation of a big hit than the big hit, it is judged whether or not there is a hold display displayed as a white triangle or quadrilateral while opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, If it is determined that there is a hold display displayed as a white triangle or a square, notification may be performed in a notification mode different from the case where there is no hold display displayed as a white triangle or a square. By doing this, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the clerk at the game arcade that the holding display is displayed as a white triangle or quadrilateral having a high expectation for a big hit than a white round shape. Etc. can be easily recognized, so that it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed inappropriately.

  Although the third modification exemplifies a mode in which the pending storage is cleared based on setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the case where the setting value that was originally set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset, the pending storage may be cleared.

  Further, in the third modification, although a mode in which the pending storage is cleared on the basis of setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, when the setting change processing is executed by the CPU 103, the hold storage is performed. You may clear it. By doing this, it is possible to reliably prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being accurately reflected in the change of the setting value.

  Further, in the third modification, the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 109SG 712 are closed based on the setting of the new setting value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, but The present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (A), the timing at which the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 109SG029, that is, the setting is made by the CPU 103. When the change process is executed, the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening 109SG 712 may be closed. By doing this, it is possible to reliably prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being accurately reflected in the change of the setting value.

  Further, in the third modification, the game control data holding area 109SG150 is held open during the opening of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, but there is illustrated the form in which the notification by the notification means is executed. The invention is not limited to this, and when there is pending storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open, new setting values can not be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as well. The new setting value may be hard to set by providing a more complicated change procedure than when there is no hold storage in the game control data holding area 109SG150 while the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is open. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being cleared by mistake when a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Modification 4)
Further, in the present embodiment, the display monitor 109SG029 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 109SG029A to the fifth display unit 109SG029E, and the second display unit 109SG029B to the fifth display unit 109SG029E in the first display unit 109SG029A. Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the setting values of the coupling ratio, the duty ratio, and the base are displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. The display monitor may not be provided with a display unit for displaying the setting values of the ratio, combination ratio, and base during display. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the ratio at setting value 1, ratio, base is red, ratio at setting value 2, ratio, ratio, base is green, By displaying the coupling ratio, combination ratio, and base at setting value 3 in blue, it is possible to grasp at which setting value the combination ratio, combination ratio, and base being displayed on the display monitor 109SG029 are used. It may be easy.

  Further, in the present embodiment and the fourth modification, the display monitor 109SG029 can switch and display the ratio, combination ratio, and base at setting value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds, and also operates the display switching switch 109SG030. The ratio of the set value 1 to the set value 1, the combination ratio of the base at intervals of 5 seconds, the combination ratio at the set value 2, the combination ratio, the change display of the base at 5 seconds interval, the ratio of the set value 3 Although the form which can be changed to the switching display at intervals of 5 seconds of the base ratio and the base is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a ratio at setting value 1, a ratio at setting value 2, Switching display at 5 seconds intervals of coupling ratio at setting value 3, switching display at 5 seconds interval of setting ratio at setting value 2, combination ratio at setting value 2, setting ratio 3 and setting ratio 1 Base, setting value In the base, and a switching display in 5 second intervals of the base in the setting value 3, it may be switched for each operation of the display switch 109SG030 a.

(Modification 5)
Further, in the present embodiment, the security cover 109SG500A is illustrated as being fixed to the outer frame 109SG001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the game machine frame 109SG003 side. It is also good. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B) as the fifth modification, the security cover 109SG500B formed of the short piece 109SG500Ba and the long piece 109SG500Bb is, for example, a case where The right end of the long piece 109SG500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 and the covering release position on the right side of the covering position. Make it moveable.

  On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid to the right with respect to the substrate case 109SG201 to lock the through hole 109SG500Bc formed in the left portion of the long piece 109SG500Bb. The switch 109SG051 and the setting selection switch 109SG052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the security cover 109SG500B (long piece 109SG500Bb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 109SG201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the slide movement to the lower side. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500B is slid in the right direction with respect to the substrate case 109SG201 to release the state where the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be in a state where it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A) and 20-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 109SG500B from the substrate case 109SG201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the projection size of the security cover 109SG500B from the substrate case 109SG201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 109SG500B relative to the substrate case 109SG201. (L2> L1).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is pivoted about the predetermined pivoting axis and opened, the projecting dimension from the security case 109SG500B from the substrate case 109SG201 is By sliding the board case 109SG201 to the length L2 (by setting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the permitted state), a store clerk or the like at the game arcade operates the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting change switch 109SG052 to perform pachinko game The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (B), the security cover 109SG500B is used as the substrate case 109SG201 until the projecting dimension from the substrate case 109SG201 becomes the length L1. If the slide movement is not performed (if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 109SG500B abuts on the front end of the outer frame 109SG001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 109SG003 It has become.

  For this reason, in the first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 109SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, so the security cover 109SG500B is set to be the lock switch 109SG051. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover with the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit, and it is possible to improve security.

  In the state where the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ba is disposed between the outer frame 109SG001a and the gaming machine frame 109SG003 so that movement from the covering position in the lateral direction is restricted. However, the security cover 109SG500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state in which the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 are covered by the security cover 109SG500B is maintained. .

(Modification 6)
Further, as a form of providing the security cover on the side of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, as shown in FIGS. 20-37 (A) and 20-38 (B) as a sixth modification, the left end portion of the security cover 109SG500C Covering position to cover the right side portion of the substrate case 109SG201 including the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 and pivoted from the covering position around the pivot 109SG500Cd which is provided on the back side of the frame 109SG003 and which is directed vertically It may be pivotally supported between the covering release position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 109SG500Ca is locked to the locking portion 109SG500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 109SG001a, and the long piece 109SG500Cb is switched to the lock switch 109SG051. The switch 109SG052 and the cover from the back side may be restricted from pivoting to the back side.

  Then, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security switch 109SG500C is rotated about the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 109SG201 and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 It should just be able to operate by releasing the state where it covered. That is, in the sixth modification, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is closed, the rotation is restricted in a state where the security cover 109SG500C (long piece 109SG500Cb) covers the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052. Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is opened, the security cover 109SG500C is pivoted about the pivot 109SG500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the substrate case 109SG201 to lock the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switch 109SG052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (can be changed to the allowed state).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (A), the security cover 109SG500C in the present modification 6 is pivoted about the pivot 109SG500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed to be in the permitted state), thereby making it possible to The store clerk or the like can change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by operating the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting change switch 109SG052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (B), the security cover 109SG500C is rotated clockwise in plan view, and the security switch 109SG500C is used for the lock switch. If the 109SG 051 or the setting changeover switch 109 SG 052 is not covered (unless changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 109 SG 500 C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 109 SG 001 a and closes the gaming machine frame 109 SG 003 It has become impossible.

  For this reason, in the sixth modification, since it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 109SG003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permitted state, the security switch 109SG500C is set to be the lock switch 109SG051. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover with the changeover switch 109SG052, that is, closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 without restricting the operation on the operation unit, and it is possible to improve security.

(Modification 7)
Moreover, although the said embodiment illustrated the form which can change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by opening the gaming machine frame 109SG003, this invention is not limited to this, A glass door frame frame The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening 109SG003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 109SG003a in this manner, as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (A) to 20-39 (C) as the seventh modification. As described above, the through hole 109SG003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 109SG003, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 may be operable via the through hole 109SG003b.

  As described above, when the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 can be operated through the through hole 109SG003b, the door 109SG003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 109SG003b is provided, and the door 109SG003c is closed. The operations of the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 may be restricted. When the door 109SG003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 as shown in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-39 (C), the door is closed by closing the glass door frame 109SG003a. Since 109SG003c is held between the glass door frame 109SG003a and the gaming machine frame 109SG003 in an openable / closable manner, the lock switch 109SG051 or the setting changeover switch 109SG052 may be improperly operated when the glass door frame 109SG003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Description about the characteristic part 2 of this embodiment)
Next, the feature part 2 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in the gaming machine capable of changing the setting value as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, setting information (setting value) is stored in both the RAM 102 on the main substrate 11 and the RAM 122 on the presentation control substrate 12 It is conceivable to store the value). However, in such a case, the pachinko gaming machine is used to store setting information in the RAM 122 without any processing, or to output a command including setting information which has not been processed in the presentation control substrate 12 from the main substrate 11 side. Compare the contents of the RAM 122 and the command output from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when the setting value of 1 is “1” and when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “2” or “3” This makes it easy to analyze the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 converts the setting value into a setting concealment value, which will be described later, and outputs a command including the setting concealment value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 The setting value specified in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is difficult to specify by converting the setting value specified from the command into a setting corresponding value described later and storing it.

  Hereinafter, the feature portion 2 in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-40, a setting value designating command (for designating the setting value (new set value changed) stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 as an effect control command to the effect control board 12 ( A command D1XXH) is provided. In the setting value specification command, different EXT data is set according to the setting concealment value after changing the setting value.

  Further, in the setting value changing process (see FIG. 20-21), the CPU 103 executes setting value conversion processing for changing the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 into the setting concealment value. In the setting value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41, the CPU 103 first specifies a new setting value (setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) (109 SGS 301). Next, the CPU 103 converts the specified setting value into a setting value concealment value (109 SGS 302).

  In the process of 109SGS 302, for example, CPU 103 may convert the specified setting value into a concealment value using a conversion table as shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) or FIG. 20-42 (2). . FIG. 20-42 (1) is a diagram showing the conversion table A in which the value of 1 having no regularity is set for each set value. When converting the setting value to the concealment value using the main conversion table A, for example, when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS 301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “150”. When the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value "41", and when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS301 is "3", the setting value Is converted to the setting concealment value "34".

  Further, FIG. 20-42 (2) is a diagram showing the conversion table B in which a value of 1 having a specific regularity is set for each setting value. When converting the setting value to the setting concealment value using the main conversion table B, for example, when the setting value specified in the processing of 109SGS 301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “4” If the setting value specified in the processing of 109 SGS 301 is “2”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “5”, and if the setting value specified in the processing of 109 SGS 301 is “3”, the setting Convert the value to the setting secret value "6". That is, the conversion table B is a conversion table in which a value obtained by adding “3” to the setting value stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 is set as the setting concealment value.

  When the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value using the conversion table A in the process of 110SG 302, the setting concealment value is converted to a value having no regularity (setting concealment value) for each setting value. When outputting the setting value designation command including to the effect control board 12, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze or falsify the set value (setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102). On the other hand, when converting the setting value to the setting concealment value using the conversion table B in the processing of 109SGS 302, the setting value is converted to a value having restriction (setting concealment value) for each setting value. It is possible to reduce the processing load when specifying the setting value from the setting value concealment value in the update process (see FIG. 20-45).

  Also, in the processing of 109SGS 302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (3), the specified setting value is converted by a predetermined conversion coefficient (for example, a common multiple of setting values “1”, “2”, and “3” Arithmetic conversion may be performed in which the value obtained by multiplication (operation A) or division (operation B) by a certain “6” or “12” or the like is used as the setting concealment value.

  Furthermore, in the processing of 109 SGS 302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (4), a numerical shift using a value obtained by adding (shift A) or subtracting (shift B) a predetermined numeric value to the specified setting value A conversion may be performed.

  In the numerical shift conversion in shift A, for example, when the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 is “1”, the setting value is converted into the setting concealment value “12”, and the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 If the value is “2”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “13”, and if the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS 301 is “3”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “14” That is, a value obtained by shifting +11 from the set value may be used as the set secret value. In addition, in the numerical shift conversion in shift B, for example, when the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 is “1”, the setting value is converted into the setting concealment value “0”, and the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 When the value is "2", the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value "1", and when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS 301 is "3", the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value "2" That is, a value obtained by performing a shift of -1 with respect to the setting value may be used as the setting concealment value.

  Also, in the processing of 109 SGS 302, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (4), among the consecutive 8-digit bits (00000000), the bit corresponding to the specified setting value is set (changed from 0 to 1) ) A bit position conversion may be performed with the value as the setting value concealment value. Specifically, when the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “00000001”, and the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 is “2” May convert the setting value to the setting concealment value “00000001”, and may convert the setting value to the setting concealment value “00000100” when the setting value specified in the process of 109SGS 301 is “3” (position A) If the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 is “1”, the setting value is converted to the setting concealment value “10000000”, and the setting value specified in the process of 109 SGS 301 is “2” The set value is converted to the set secret value "01000000", and the set value specified in the process of 109SGS 301 is "3". Some cases may be converted to a set confidential value set value "00100000" (Position B).

  As described above, after converting the setting value into the setting concealment value by one of the methods shown in FIG. 20-42 in the process of 109SGS 302, the CPU 103 transmits the setting of the setting value designation command including the converted setting concealment value. To complete the set value conversion process (S109 SGS 303). The setting value specification command for which transmission setting has been performed in S109 SGS 303 is output to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing command control processing (S27). The setting value conversion process is executed at the timing when the store clerk or the like in the game arcade presses the lock switch 109SG051, as shown in FIG. 20-43, that is, the timing when a new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. do it.

  Next, an aspect when the effect control board 12 receives the setting value designation command will be described. FIG. 20-44 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 20-44, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main substrate 11 transmitted via the relay substrate 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether there is a command (109SGS 221). At this time, if there is no reception command (109 SGS 221; N), the command analysis processing is ended.

  If there is a receive command at 109 SGS 221 (109 SGS 221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether the receive command is the first starting opening winning a prize designation command (109 SGS 222 ). Then, when it is the first starting opening winning combination designation command (109 SGS 222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (109 SGS 223). For example, in the process of 109 SGS 223, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit. .

  If the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command at 109 SGS 222 (109 SGS 222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (109 SGS 224). Then, when it is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (109 SGS 224; Y), the second holding storage number notification waiting time is set (109 SGS 225). For example, in the process of 109SGS 225, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command at 109 SGS 224 (109 SGS 224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command (109 SGS 226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at 109 SGS 226 (109 SGS 226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command (109 SGS 227). If the received command is not a variation category command at 109 SGS 227 (109 SGS 227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command (109 SGS 228). Then, when it is the first pending storage number notification command (109 SGS 228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (109 SGS 229).

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at 109 SGS 228 (109 SGS 228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (109 SGS 230). Then, when it is the second pending storage number notification command (109 SGS 230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (109 SGS 231).

  Then, after executing any of the processes of 109SGS 229 and 109SGS 231, “1” indicating that the pending display mode is undecided is set in the display undecided flag of the stored entry (109SGS 232).

  If the received command is a symbol designation command at 109 SGS 226 (109 SGS 226; Y), if the received command is a variation category command at 109 SGS 227 (S 227; Y), execute one of 109 SGS 223, 109 SGS 225, 109 SGS 232 processing After that, the reception command is stored at the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (not shown) (109SGS233), and the process returns to the processing of 109SGS221.

  If the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the pending storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the start winning at reception command buffer 194A.

  When the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command at 109 SGS 230 (109 SGS 230; N), it is determined whether the received command is the setting value specification command (109 SGS 232). If the received command is a setting value specification command (109SGS232; Y), the setting value update processing for storing the setting value specified from the setting value specification command in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is executed (S109SGS233 ), Return to 109SGS21. If the received command is not the set value designation command in 109 SGS 232 (109 SGS 232; N), after setting according to the other received commands (109 SGS 234), the process returns to 109 SGS 221.

  FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart of the setting value update process in the command analysis process. In the setting value update process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the setting value (the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) from the received setting value designation command (110 SGS 311). In the process of the 110SGS 311, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the setting concealment value from the received setting value designation command, and the setting value corresponds to the method of converting the setting value into the setting value concealment value by the CPU 103. The setting value may be specified from the concealment value.

  For example, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using the conversion table A, if the setting concealment value identified from the setting value designation command is “150”, the setting value is identified as “1”; If the setting concealment value specified from the setting value specification command is "41", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting concealment value specified from the setting value specification command is "34", the setting value is "3" It should be specific to When the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using the conversion table B, if the setting concealment value identified from the setting value designation command is “4”, the setting value is identified as “1”, If the setting concealment value specified from the setting value specification command is "5", the setting value is specified as "2", and if the setting concealment value specified from the setting value specification command is "6", the setting value is "3" It should be specific to

  In addition, when the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using the operation A as calculation conversion, a value obtained by dividing the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command by a predetermined conversion coefficient is specified as the setting value. Just do it. When the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value by using the operation B as calculation conversion, a value obtained by multiplying the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command by a predetermined conversion coefficient is specified as the setting value. Just do it.

  When the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using shift A as numerical shift conversion, if the setting concealment value identified from the setting value designation command is “12”, the setting value is identified as “1”. If the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is "13", the setting value is identified as "2", and if the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is "14", the setting value is " It should be specified in 3). When the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using shift B as numerical shift conversion, if the setting concealment value identified from the setting value designation command is “0”, the setting value is identified as “1”. If the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is “1”, the setting value is identified as “2”, and if the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is “2”, the setting value is “ It should be specified in 3).

  When the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using position A as bit position conversion, if the setting concealment value identified from the setting value designation command is “00000001”, the setting value is identified as “1”. If the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is "00000010", the setting value is identified as "2", and if the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is "00000100", the setting value is " It should be specified in 3). When the CPU 103 converts the setting value to the setting concealment value using position B as bit position conversion, if the setting concealment value identified from the setting value designation command is “10000000”, the setting value is identified as “1”. If the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is "01000000", the setting value is identified as "2", and if the setting concealment value specified from the setting value designation command is "00100000", the setting value is " It should be specified in 3).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified in the 110 SGS 311 into a setting corresponding value of 1 corresponding to the specified setting value (110 SGS 312), and converts the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 into a setting corresponding The value is updated and stored, and the setting value update process is ended (110 SGS 313).

  In the processes of 110SGS 312 and 110SGS 313, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value using, for example, the conversion table or arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, etc. shown in FIG. It may be converted to a different value (setting corresponding value) and updated and stored in the RAM 122. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 converts the setting value specified from the setting value designation command received from the main substrate 11 into the setting correspondence value without updating and storing the setting value as it is or as the setting concealment value. By updating and storing the information in the RAM 122, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is analyzed and that the value different from the setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122.

  Note that the method for the effect control CPU 120 to convert the setting value to the setting correspondence value in 110 SGS 312 may be the same as the method for converting the setting value to the setting concealment value in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the setting value conversion processing. , May be different.

  Furthermore, when updating and storing a value (a setting corresponding value) corresponding to the set value thus set in the RAM 122, the effect control CPU 120 changes the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 over a predetermined period (for example, until 100 times of variable display is performed or 1 hour elapses). It is also good. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-46, according to the setting correspondence value stored in the RAM 122, the image display device 5 is maintained for the predetermined period described above after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. As background images, spring, summer, and winter background images may be displayed at different rates in the morning to perform background rendering (setting value suggestion rendering).

  For example, the CPU for effect control 120 determines an image to be displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 as a set value suggestive effect after the source power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 as spring, summer, or winter. At this time, when the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines an image to be displayed as a background image to be a winter image at a rate of 80%. Then, decide on spring images at a rate of 15%, and decide on summer images at a rate of 5%. When the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “2”, an image to be displayed as a background image is determined as a winter image at a rate of 60%, and at a rate of 30% Decide on the spring image and decide on the summer image at a rate of 10%. Then, if the setting corresponding value stored in the RAM 122 is a value corresponding to the setting value “3”, an image to be displayed as a background image is determined as a winter image at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 45% Decide on the spring image and decide on the summer image at a rate of 15%.

  In the present embodiment, since the setting value 1 is the most advantageous setting value for the player and the setting value 3 is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5 from the time until the predetermined period elapses, the game interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, although a mode in which the image displayed as the background image of the image display device 5 is made different as the setting value suggestion effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value suggestion As the effect, a pachinko game is displayed on the image display device 5 by displaying a specific character, speech or the like during the variable display, during the big hit game, the end timing of the big hit game, during the variable display after a specific number of times (for example, 500 times) It may be an effect that suggests a set value set in the machine 1. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mode is described in which the setting value suggestion effect is executed until a predetermined period elapses after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, but the present invention is limited thereto Instead, the setting value indication effect may be an effect that can be performed regardless of the period after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the setting value conversion process, the CPU 103 converts the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a setting concealment value using a conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, etc. Although the form to convert is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the setting value conversion processing, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is converted to the conversion table, arithmetic conversion, numerical shift conversion A method other than the bit position conversion may be used to convert the setting concealment value, or the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be converted to the setting concealment value using two or more methods.

  Further, in the present embodiment, CPU 120 for presentation control in the setting value updating process, using the conversion table, calculation conversion, numerical shift conversion, bit position conversion, etc., for the setting value specified from the setting value specification command. Although the form of converting into the setting correspondence value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the setting value update processing, the setting value specified from the setting value designation command is converted to the conversion table or arithmetic conversion It may be converted to the setting corresponding value using methods other than numerical shift conversion and bit position conversion, or even if the setting value specified from the setting value specification command is converted to the setting corresponding value using two or more methods. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new setting value is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value designation command including the setting concealment value obtained by converting the setting value to the effect control board 12 Although the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the setting value specified from the setting value designation command is converted into the setting correspondence value and stored in the RAM 122, the present invention is not limited to this, and pachinko gaming machines When a new set value is set to 1, only one of the conversion of the set value by the CPU 103 into the set secret value and the conversion of the set value by the effect control CPU 120 into the set corresponding value is executed. It is also good. When the CPU 103 does not execute conversion of the setting value to the setting concealment value, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value designation command including the setting value to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 specifies the setting value. The setting value specified from the command may be converted into a setting corresponding value and stored in the RAM 122. When the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the change of the setting value to the setting corresponding value, the CPU 103 outputs a setting value designation command including the setting concealment value obtained by converting the setting value to the effect control board 12, The control CPU 120 may store the setting value specified from the setting value specification command in the RAM 122 as it is.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9H, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second reach effect of the super reach A or the super reach B as the first suggested effect, and the second In addition to being able to carry out Super Reach C or Super Reach D reach production as a suggested effect, when performing Super Reach C or Super Reach D reach production, the Super Reach C or Super Reach D reach Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C and the super reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the introductory portion of the super reach A and the super reach B, super reach effect (for example, displaying an enemy character or an enemy in a mode related to a title notified thereafter) By executing the effect that suggests the character, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect.

In addition, a second invention described below is also included in the present embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, a setting value specification command capable of specifying the setting value is transmitted to the effect control board performing the effect, and the setting value is transmitted to the effect control board. The notification control board for controlling the setting suggestion effect is notified, and the effect control board for controlling the setting suggestion effect is a board for controlling the effect rather than controlling the progression of the game, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board to play, if the set value stored in the effect control board is falsified, an inappropriate setting suggestion effect is performed. There was a problem that there was a fear that it would end. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 20-21);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5);
Effect control means for controlling effects based on control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes a background effect (setting value suggestive effect) as shown in FIG. 20-46) When,
Equipped with
The game control means is setting value control information (for example, a secret value which is a numerical value different from the setting value set by the setting means as the control information capable of specifying the setting value (for example, a secret value) And a setting value designation command) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a command control process (S27) after the process of 110SG 303 of the setting value conversion process).
The effect control means stores the concealment value included in the setting value control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of 110SG 313 of the setting value update process shown in FIG. 20-45) It is possible to execute effects related to the setting value specified from the secret value (for example, until one hour has passed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, 100 times of variable display is performed) together with the portion to be executed). In the morning until 1 hour background effect (part that performs setting value indication effect)
According to this feature, the stored setting value can be prevented from being falsified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the setting value and the concealment value are associated with each other (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the setting value conversion process shown in FIG. 20, conversion of setting values into setting concealment values using conversion table A shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) and conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42 (2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the processing load of conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The game control means performs the conversion by performing an operation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103) Operation conversion shown in Fig. 20-42 (3) (the part that converts the setting value into the setting secret value using the operation A or the operation B)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with, while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting the specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1 (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. − A part that converts a setting value into a setting secret value using bit position conversion (position A or position B) shown in-42 (5)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with, while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4) (The part which converts a setting value into a setting secret value using numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with, while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

In addition, a third invention described below is also included in the present embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, a setting value specification command capable of specifying the setting value is transmitted to the effect control board performing the effect, and the setting value is transmitted to the effect control board. The notification control board for controlling the setting suggestion effect is notified, and the effect control board for controlling the setting suggestion effect is a board for controlling the effect rather than controlling the progression of the game, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board to play, if the set value stored in the effect control board is falsified, an inappropriate setting suggestion effect is performed. There was a problem that there was a fear that it would end. Therefore, as the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third aspect of the invention for solving the problem, when focusing on the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 20-21);
Game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5);
Effect control means (for example, a portion for performing process control processing shown in FIG. 5 by the CPU 103) for controlling an effect based on control information transmitted from the game control means;
Equipped with
The game control means can transmit setting value control information (for example, a setting value specification command) including the setting value as the control information (for example, after the CPU 103 executes the processing of 110SG 303 of the setting value conversion processing, a command) A part that executes control processing (S27)),
The effect control means converts the setting value included in the setting value control information transmitted from the game control means into a concealment value which is a numerical value different from the setting value and stores the same (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) In the processing of 110SG 313 of the setting value update process shown in FIG. 20-45, the setting value specified from the stored concealment value together with the portion for converting the setting value specified from the setting value designation command into the setting correspondence value and storing) Can be performed (for example, until one hour has passed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, or until 100 variable displays are performed). Part to execute)
According to this feature, the stored setting value can be prevented from being falsified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the setting value and the concealment value are associated with each other (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the setting value conversion process shown in FIG. 20, conversion of setting values into setting concealment values using conversion table A shown in FIG. 20-42 (1) and conversion table B shown in FIG. 20-42 (2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being tampered with while reducing the processing load of conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The game control means performs the conversion by performing an operation with a predetermined conversion coefficient on the set value (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103) Operation conversion shown in Fig. 20-42 (3) (the part that converts the setting value into the setting secret value using the operation A or the operation B)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with, while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by setting the specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1 (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. − A part that converts a setting value into a setting secret value using bit position conversion (position A or position B) shown in-42 (5)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with, while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The game control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number (for example, in the process of 110 SGS 302 of the set value conversion process shown in FIG. 20-41 by the CPU 103, FIG. 20-42 (4) (The part which converts a setting value into a setting secret value using numerical shift conversion (shift A or shift B) shown in)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the set value from being tampered with, while reducing the data capacity required for conversion.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the embodiment described above, the game machine frame 109SG003 capable of opening and closing the opening of the outer frame 109SG001a and the glass door frame 109SG003a capable of opening and closing the front face of the game machine frame 109SG003a are exemplified as opening and closing bodies. The present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a front door capable of opening and closing a front opening of a housing like a slot machine. In addition to those which can be opened and closed by turning, those which are opened and closed by sliding or attaching and detaching may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 are applied as the operation unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 are not limited to this. Only one of them may be used, or another operation unit with different operation modes (for example, pull operation, press operation, rotation operation, etc.) such as other switches, buttons, levers, dials, touch sensors, etc.

  In the above embodiment, the security cover 109SG500A, 109SG500B, 109SG500C is applied as the restricting member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation unit may be formed of such a plate-like member. Even if it is not a member to cover, if it is a member which can control operation of an operation part, shape, size, material, etc. can be changed variously. Specifically, for example, instead of covering the operation unit, the operation unit may be restricted by contacting the operation unit or the like.

  Further, in the above embodiment, security covers 109SG500A, 109SG500B, 109SG500C as restricting members only need to be in a state in which the operation is difficult by covering the operation portion in the restricted state of the operation portion, and the operation can not necessarily be performed. It does not have to be.

  In the above embodiment, the setting switching main body having the operation unit such as the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting switching switch 109SG052 is mounted on the main board 11, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main substrate 11 may be provided on a substrate separate from the main substrate 11, may be accommodated in a case other than the substrate case 109SG201, or may not be accommodated in the substrate case 109SG201.

  In the fifth and sixth modifications, the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C as the restricting members exemplarily have a configuration in which the gaming machine frame 109SG003 can not be closed in the cover release position, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003, for example, an interlocking mechanism interlocked with the closing operation of the gaming machine frame 109SG003 is provided so that the security covers 109SG500B and 109SG500C return from the covering release position to the covering position. It is also good.

  In the above embodiment, the board case 109SG201 provided with the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting change switch 109SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the game machine frame 109SG003 is provided at a position where it is difficult to operate when closed, a place other than the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a glass door frame at the front of the game machine frame 109SG003 You may provide in the position closed by 109SG003a, or outer frame 109SG001a etc.).

  Further, in the embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the fact that both the clear switch (see FIG. 3) and the lock switch 105SG 051 are on (setting change processing Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and other processes may be executed depending on the combination of the clear switch and the ON / OFF of the lock switch 105SG051. For example, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 105SG051 is ON, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked (setting confirmation processing is executed), and the clear switch is ON. When the lock switch 105SG051 is OFF, the data stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and when both the clear switch and the lock switch 105SG051 are OFF, recovery processing from power failure (recovery processing shown in FIG. 3) Just do it. In addition, during execution of the setting change process and the setting check process mentioned above, the variation display of the special symbol and the firing of the game ball, whether or not the variation display result is a big hit, various lottery such as big hit type, the payout of prize balls etc It should just be controlled to the game stop state which does not perform any process of.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but for example, it is possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value As a result of the variable display result being derived on the image display device capable of variable display of a plurality of kinds of symbols that can be identified, one game is ended, and according to the variable display result derived on the image display device The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which winning is made possible.

(Description of feature part 57SH)
[First Embodiment of Feature 57SH]
Next, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine including the feature portion 57SH of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine including features. As shown in FIG. 21A, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a sub image display device 57SH51. The sub image display device 57SH51 is fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5. The sub image display device 57SH51 is configured of, for example, a liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal). The sub image display device 57SH51 has a smaller screen than the image display device 5, and the player is less likely to see it than the image display device 5. The sub-image display device 57SH51 may be a display device other than the liquid crystal display device. The sub-image display device 57SH51 may be configured of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub image display device 57SH51 is fixed near the image display device 5 or the like, but may be movable or retractable.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 produces a game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying an image on the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 57SH51. In addition, a game is produced by outputting a sound from the speakers 8 (8L, 8R) or by turning on / off the game effect lamp 9. A plurality of reproduction channels of the sound emitted from the speaker 8 are provided. For example, the sound corresponding to the display of the image display device 5 is output from the first sound output channel, and the sound corresponding to the display of the sub image display device 57SH51 is It is output from the second sound output channel. The sound output from the first sound output channel is output from the right speaker 8 </ b> R closer to the image display device 5. On the other hand, the sound output from the second sound output channel is output from the left speaker 8L closer to the sub-image display device 57SH51.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during the special figure game, it will be a "big hit", but before displaying whether or not it becomes a big hit, various effects such as advance notice effect and reach effect are executed By doing, the special figure game is enlivened. The advance notice effect and the reach effect are performed using the image display device 5 and the sub image display device 57SH51.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a treasure chest effect can be performed as one of the advance effects. In the treasure box effect, the treasure box is displayed, the treasure box is opened, and the contents (characters) of the treasure box are displayed. The contents of the treasure box are characters displayed on the image display device 5, and give notice (recommend) effects and the like to be executed later according to the displayed characters.

  As the effects to be announced for the treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), the pending change effect, the zone effect, the pseudo link effect, the reach effect, the reach effect of the super reach (hereinafter referred to as “SP reach effect”) , And there is a big hit notification effect (fanfare effect). Among them, the pseudo-series effect, the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the notice of the big hit notification effect can be performed by the image display device 5. Further, the notification of the on-hold change effect, the zone effect, and the reach effect can be executed by the sub-image display device 57SH51. In the following description, the image display device 5 may be referred to as "main liquid crystal 5" and the sub-image display device 57SH51 may be referred to as "sub-liquid crystal 57SH51" in order to compare and explain two display devices. Further, since the big hit notification effect is executed when the big hit state is started, substantially, in the chest effect, the execution of the big hit state is also indicated (suggested).

  The treasure box effect is to be executed when the prefetch notice effect is executed, the SP reach is executed, and when the result of the special drawing game is a loss, the SP reach is executed and the result of the special drawing game is a big hit There is. Hereinafter, the treasure chest effect when the prefetch advance notice effect is executed is "previous treasure box effect", the SP reach is executed, and the treasure box effect executed when the result of the special drawing game is lost is "SP reach lost treasure box effect", The treasure chest effect executed when the SP reach is executed and the result of the special drawing game is a big hit is also referred to as "SP reach big hit treasure chest effect".

  The on-hold change effect and the zone effect are effects to be executed as preview advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is on hold), and for variable display not yet started. It is executed according to the result of the pre-reading determination. The variable display not yet started here is also referred to as a prefetch target. Moreover, the pseudo-series effect, the reach effect, and the SP reach effect are advance notice effects for giving notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The jackpot notification effect is an effect of notifying the start of the jackpot state.

  In the treasure box effect, when the pending change effect is notified, the effect that the character of "change!" Jumps out of the treasure box is executed. When the zone effect is announced, the word "SPECIAL!", When the simulated effect is announced, the word "continued", when the reach effect is announced, the word "chance!" When the SP reach effect is announced, the letters "super heat!" And when the big hit notification effect is announced, the letters "Congratulations!"

  The on-hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the on-hold display displayed on the image display device 5 changes. The zone effect is an effect in which the background image and the effect mode are shifted to different zones (stage, effect mode, etc.). As zone effects, there may be a plurality of types of effects having different background images and effect modes. The pseudo-series effect is a production that makes one variable display appear like multiple variable display in a pseudo manner by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern while temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. . The treasure box effect is executable when the advance notice effect is executed and when the SP reach effect is executed.

  It should be noted that the treasure box effect may be performed when the advance notice effect is not performed and the SP reach effect is not performed. For example, the treasure box effect may be performed when the advance notice effect is not performed and the reach effect of normal reach is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic part 57SH, the SP reach effect is always executed when the treasure box effect is executed, but by including the case where the SP reach is not executed, the pleasure when the SP reach is executed is greatly increased. can do. In addition, a treasure box effect may be performed without an effect or the like to be announced. In the case of the treasure box effect with no effect to be notified etc., the treasure box may be opened, and even if smoke or the like is generated, it may be an effect without contents.

  FIG. 21B is a diagram for explaining the execution ratio of the treasure box effect. As shown in FIG. 21B, the prefetched treasure box effect is performed at a rate of 80% of the case where the prefetched notice effect is executed. In addition, the SP reach loss treasure box effect is performed at 50% of the case where the SP reach effect is executed and the result of the special drawing game is “loss”. SP reach big hit treasure chest effect is executed in 90% of cases where the SP reach effect is executed and the result of the special view game is "big hit". When the SP reach effect is performed, the advance notice effect is not performed. For this reason, the treasure box effect is not performed twice or more in one variable display.

  In the pre-reading treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21C, in the sub liquid crystal 57SH 51, the pending change effect is notified at a rate of 70%, and the zone effect is notified at a rate of 30%. In the SP reach lost treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (D), in the main liquid crystal 5, the pseudo continuous effect is notified at a rate of 40%, the reach effect is notified at a rate of 40%, and the rate of 10% In the sub liquid crystal 57SH 51, the reach effect is announced at a rate of 10%. In the SP reach big hit treasure chest effect, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), in the main liquid crystal 5, the pseudo-series effect is notified at a rate of 10%, the reach effect is notified at a rate of 20%, and 35% The SP reach effect is announced at a rate, the big hit notification effect is announced at a rate of 5%, and the reach effect is announced at a rate of 30% in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51.

  Next, the procedure of the treasure box effect determination process of the characteristic part 57SH will be described. FIG. 21C is a flowchart of an example of the treasure box effect determination process of the characteristic part 57SH. As shown in FIG. 21C, in the treasure box effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 57SHS10). In addition, the fluctuation pattern specification command corresponds to the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the special figure game, and each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device 5 It is a command which designates fluctuation pattern (variation time), such as a production design by which fluctuation display is carried out, is determined by the main substrate 11, and is transmitted to the production control substrate 12 from the main substrate 11. In addition, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command indicating “non reach loss”, “normal reach loss”, “SP reach loss”, and “SP reach big hit”.

  When the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received (step 57 SHS10: NO), the CPU for effect control 120 ends the treasure box effect determination processing. When the fluctuation pattern designation command is received (step 57 SHS10: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern designation command of "SP reach jackpot". (Step 57SHS12).

  If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is “SP reach big hit” (step 57 SHS12: YES), the CPU 120 for effect control controls SP reach big hit treasure box effect based on the treasure box effect execution ratio shown in FIG. 21-2 (B). It is determined whether or not to execute (step 57SHS14).

  As a result, when executing the SP reach big hit treasure chest effect (step 57 SHS14: YES), the CPU 120 for production control refers to the SP reach big hit treasure chest effect contents determination table shown in FIG. The content of the effect to be announced in advance by the treasure box effect is determined (step 57SHS16). If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is not "SP reach big hit" (step 57SHS12: NO), if SP reach big hit treasure chest effect is not executed (step 57 SHS14: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 57 SHS18. .

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the received fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern designation command of “SP reach loss” (step 57SHS18). If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is "SP reach loss" (step 57SHS18: YES), the CPU 120 for effect control executes the SP reach loss treasure box effect based on the treasure box effect execution ratio shown in FIG. 21-2 (B). It is determined whether or not to do (step 57SHS20).

  As a result, when executing the SP reach loss treasure box effect (step 57 SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the SP reach loss treasure box effect content determination table shown in FIG. The content of the effect to be announced is determined (step 57SHS22). If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is not "SP reach loss" (step 57SHS18: NO), if the SP reach loss treasure box effect is not executed (step 57SHS20: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 57SHS24.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is a preread object (step 57SHS24). If there is a preread object (step 57SHS24: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the preread treasure box effect based on the treasure box effect execution ratio shown in FIG. 21-2 (B) (step 57SHS26) ).

  As a result, when the prefetch treasure box effect is executed (step 57SHS26: YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetch treasure box effect contents determination table shown in FIG. The content of is determined (step 57SHS28). Then, the treasure box effect determination process is ended. If there is no preread object (step 57SHS24: NO), and if the preread treasure box effect is not executed (step 57SHS26: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the treasure box effect determination process as it is.

  Next, an example of the treasure box effect performed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 will be described. FIGS. 21-4 and 21-5 are diagrams showing an example of the rendering operation of the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic portion 57SH. 21-4 and 21-5 show the display modes of the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH 51 as the treasure box effect progresses, and further, the sound output from the speaker 8 (right speaker 8R, left speaker 8L). .

  FIG. 21-4 shows an example of a treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and FIG. 21-5 shows an example of a treasure box in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. The following explanation is given with the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-4 as the first treasure box effect and the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-5 as the second treasure box effect. Further, FIG. 21-6 shows a time chart of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. The first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect will be described with reference also to this time chart.

  First, an example of the first treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 will be described. In the first treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. 21B, it is a pseudo continuous effect, a reach effect, an SP reach effect, and a big hit notification effect. For this reason, no advance notice (suggestion) is performed on the pending change effect which is the advance notice effect and the zone effect.

  As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the special figure game is being executed, a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the main liquid crystal 5. In the lower position of the main liquid crystal 5, a hold display area 57SH 52 is provided in which an image (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of the hold storage information. ing. The hold display is displayed in circular white.

  In the pending display area 57SH52, the pending storage number is displayed in a format in which the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are distinguished. For example, in the main liquid crystal 5, the first hold storage number is displayed in the first hold display area 57SH 52A at the left end, and the second hold storage number is displayed in the second hold display area 57SH 52B at the right end. By distinguishing and displaying the first pending display area and the second pending display area, it is possible to easily distinguish between the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. In the example shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), three hold displays are displayed in the first hold display area 57SH 52A of the hold display area 57SH 52, and no hold display is displayed in the second hold display area 57SH 52B. .

  In the lower center of the main liquid crystal 5, an active display area 57SH53 is provided. In the active display area 57SH53, the fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuation display is displayed during the execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the (shifted, shifted) hold display erased from the hold display area. The hold display area 57SH52 and the active display area 57SH53 may be disposed at any position in the display area of the main liquid crystal 5.

  While the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the main liquid crystal 5 before the first treasure box effect is started, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the decorative character in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 Is displayed by. Since the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 is less visible than the main liquid crystal 5, when the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, this variable display can be easily noticed. In the sub-liquid crystal 57SH51, an image other than the decorative characters of the model name may be displayed, a moving image may be displayed, or a still image may be displayed.

  Subsequently, when the first time 57 SHT11 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached, the first treasure box effect is started. In the first treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), the display at the front stage of the first treasure box effect is performed. In the former stage display of the first treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. At this time, a button image 57SH31B imitating the push button 31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in a stationary state together with the treasure box 57SH10. By displaying the button image 57SH31B, the player is instructed to operate the push button 31B (operation instruction). The button image 57SH31B may be displayed in a stationary state or may be displayed in an operating state, for example, in a state of operating to move up and down. The button image 57SH31B is displayed until the push sensor 35B detects the operation valid period of the push button 31B or the operation of the push button 31B. The operation effective period of the push button 31B is between the first time 57SHT11 and the second time 57SHT12 shown in FIG. 21-6.

  While the button image 57SH31B is displayed, the time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed below the button image 57SH31B, and visually notifies the operation valid time of the push button 31B. The time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed at the same time as the button image 57SH31B is displayed. The time gauge 57SH5TG is provided with a bar indicating the operation effective period, and displays a bar which becomes shorter with the passage of time. Note that the time gauge 57SH5TG may not be displayed.

  While the bar of the time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C), when the player operates the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B, the treasure box 57SH10 Is opened, and an image in which the content wrapped in smoke jumps out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed. When the treasure box 57SH10 is opened, the left speaker 8L outputs a sound of "paka", creating an atmosphere in which the treasure box 57SH10 is opened. The contents 57SH11 that the treasure box 57SH10 opens and pops out are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  Up to this point is the display before the first treasure box effect. In the front stage display of the first treasure box effect, the appearance sound is not output from the speaker 8 as the front stage special effect sound as in the front stage display of the second treasure box effect described later. Further, the second time 57 SHT 12 is reached without the push button 31 B being operated, and when the operation effective period elapses, the bar of the time gauge 57 SH 5 TG disappears, the button image 57 SH 31 B and the treasure box 57 SH 10 also disappear, and the latter stage display is executed. The first treasure chest effect is over. The operation of the push button 31B may not be detected by the push sensor 35B, and the second time 57SHT12 may be set, and when the operation valid period has elapsed, the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect may be performed.

  When the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B during the operation effective period, when the second time 57SHT12 is reached, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased and the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect is started Ru. When the second-stage display is started, the main effect sound is outputted from the left speaker 8L as the second-stage special effect sound. The main effect sound is continuously output while the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect is displayed.

  In the latter stage display of the first treasure box effect, contents 57SH11 popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 are displayed as shown in FIG. 21D. At this time, the treasure box 57SH10 is erased but may be displayed. Here, the characters "chance!" Are displayed as the contents 57SH11. When the word "chance!" Is displayed, a sound of "chance" is output from the left speaker 8L to increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot state to be executed. Further, while the first treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-4 (B) to (D) is being executed, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57 SH 51 by decoration characters.

  By displaying the character "chance!" As the content 57SH11 on the main liquid crystal 5, execution of the reach effect is predicted. Thereafter, when the third time 57 SHT 13 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached, the first treasure box effect ends. When the first treasure box effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (E), as the first treasure box effect is notified, as the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the main liquid crystal 5, the same number, here Then, "7" is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C continues to be variably displayed, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed, and the reach effect is executed. At this time, while the sound of "reach" is output from the left speaker 8L, the decoration character of "reach" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH 51, and the start of the reach effect is notified.

  Subsequently, an example of the second treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 will be described. In the second treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, as shown in FIG. 21B, a notice (suggestment) about a pending change effect or a zone effect, which is the advance notice effect, is mainly performed. Further, in the second treasure box effect, the pseudo-series effect is also indicated (suggested), and the indication (suggested) is given for the effect other than the pre-read advance effect.

  As shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), when the special figure game is being executed, the second treasure box effect is started when the first time 57 SHT11 shown in FIG. 21-6 is reached. When the second treasure box effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the display before the second treasure box effect is performed. In the former stage display of the second treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. At this time, in the main liquid crystal 5, there is no big change, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the button image 57SH31B or the treasure box 57SH10 as shown in FIG. . In addition, when the second treasure box effect is started, an appearance sound is output from the right speaker 8R as a front stage special effect sound. The appearance sound is continuously output while the display at the front stage of the second treasure box effect is performed.

  Even if the push sensor 35B does not detect the operation of the push button 31B from the first time 57SHT11 to the second time 57SHT12, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C), the treasure box 57SH10 is opened, An image is displayed in which the content 57SH11 wound with smoke pops out of the treasure box 57SH10. Here, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, but the content 57SH11 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. When the treasure box 57SH10 is opened, the right speaker 8R outputs a sound of "paka", creating an atmosphere in which the treasure box 57SH10 is opened. Up to this point is the display before the second treasure box effect.

  When the second time 57 SHT12 is reached, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased, and the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is started. When the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is started, the main effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as the second-stage special effect sound as in the first treasure box effect. The main effect sound is continuously output while the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is displayed.

  In the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (D), the contents 57SH11 popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. Here, the characters “change!” Are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 as the contents 57SH11. At this time, the treasure box 57SH10 remains displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, but may be erased. When the characters "change!" Are displayed, the left speaker 8L outputs a sound "that?" To increase the sense of expectation for the change in the hold display. While the second treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-5C to 21D is being executed, the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the opened treasure box 57SH10.

  By displaying the characters "Change!" On the main liquid crystal 5 as the contents 57SH11, execution of the on-hold change presentation is notified. Thereafter, when it comes to the third time 57SHT13 shown in FIG. 21-6, as shown in this notice, when the second treasure box effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (E), 3 in the hold display area 57SH 52 of the main liquid crystal 5 Of the two pending indications, in the latest pending indication, the pending indication shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), the shape of the leftmost pending indication changes from circular to star-shaped. Also, the color of the pending display changes from white to blue.

  As described above, in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect can be executed as the advance notice effect, and the effect or the like to be executed later in these treasure box effects is notified. . Among them, in the first treasure box effect, the main liquid crystal 5 performs the former display and then displays the latter display. Further, in the second treasure box effect, the second-stage display is displayed after the first-stage display is performed in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. At this time, in the first treasure box effect, the post-stage display is displayed by operating the push button 31B, but in the second treasure box effect, the post-stage display is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated. For this reason, the game interest can be improved by changing the aspect of the treasure box effect as the advance notice effect.

  In the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the first treasure box effect does not output the appearance sound as the former stage special effect sound when performing the former stage display, but when performing the former stage display with the second treasure box effect. Outputs an appearance sound as a pre-stage special effect sound. For this reason, the game interest can be improved by changing the aspect of the treasure box effect as the advance notice effect.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the feature portion 57SH, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect are not simultaneously performed in one variable display. For this reason, since the treasure box 57SH10 and the contents 57SH11 are not displayed twice or more in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to improve the interest.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the treasure box effect is performed by the main liquid crystal 5. As a result, it becomes easy for the player to recognize the rendering result, so that the interest can be improved. In particular, in the second treasure box effect, the front display is performed by the sub liquid crystal 57 SH 51, but the rear display is displayed by the main liquid crystal 5. Since the effect result of the treasure box effect is displayed in the later stage display, the player can easily recognize the effect result by displaying the latter stage display on the main liquid crystal 5.

  Further, in the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the treasure box effect suggests effects other than the treasure box effect, for example, the pending change effect, the zone effect, the pseudo link effect, the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the big hit notification effect. There is. For this reason, since the variations suggested regarding effects other than the treasure box effect increase, the interest can be improved.

  In addition, in the first treasure box effect, suggestive pseudo continuous effect, reach effect, SP reach effect, and a big hit notification effect, and does not perform the pending change effect or zone effect that is the advance notice effect. In addition, in the second treasure box effect, the suggestion of the pending change effect and the zone effect, which are the advance notice effects, is performed. As described above, since the suggested effects are allocated depending on the type of the treasure box effect, the effects suggested by the type of the treasure box effect are roughly identified, so that it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, in the second treasure chest effect, it also suggests the pseudo-series effect. For this reason, even if, for example, the second treasure box effect is executed, it can be expected for the execution of effects other than the advance notice effect.

  In the first treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 and the contents 57SH11 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and the effect mainly progresses in the main liquid crystal 5 located on the left side. In the second treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, the content 57SH11 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and the pre-stage display is mainly performed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 located on the right. The second-half display is mainly displayed at. In the first treasure box effect, a sound is output from the left speaker 8L closer to the main liquid crystal 5. Further, in the former stage display of the second treasure box effect, the sound is outputted from the right speaker 8R closer to the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, and in the latter stage display, the sound is outputted from the left speaker 8L closer to the main liquid crystal 5. As described above, in the treasure box effect, since the sound is output from the speaker 8 near the display device on which an image etc. is mainly displayed, the display device on which the treasure box effect is displayed (main liquid crystal 5 or sub liquid crystal 57SH51 Since the player can be made to pay attention to the treasure box effect, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the treasure box effect and to improve the interest.

  Furthermore, since the sound relating to the treasure box effect is output from either one of the right speaker 8R or the left speaker 8L, the speaker not outputting the sound relating to the treasure box effect does not output the sound relating to the treasure box effect. Sound can be output. Therefore, for example, when different effects are executed at the same timing as the treasure box effect, and the effect is an effect that emits a sound, the sound of the effect can be output from a speaker that does not output a sound related to the treasure box effect. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the output sound is difficult to hear.

Second Embodiment of Feature 57SH
Next, a second embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine including the feature portion 57SH will be described. The second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine including the feature portion 57SH is different from the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine including the feature portion 57SH in the aspect of the treasure box effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine including the characteristic part 57SH will be described focusing on the content of the treasure box effect.

  An example of a treasure box effect performed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 in the characteristic portion 57SH will be described. FIGS. 21-7 and 21-8 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the second embodiment of the feature portion 57SH. FIGS. 21-7 and 21-8 show the display modes of the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH 51 as the treasure box effect progresses, and the sounds output from the speaker 8 (right speaker 8R, left speaker 8L). .

  21-7 shows an example of a treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and FIG. 21-8 shows an example of a treasure box in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. The following explanation is given with the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-7 as the first treasure box effect and the treasure box effect shown in FIG. 21-8 as the second treasure box effect. Further, FIG. 21-9 shows time charts of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. The first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect will be described with reference also to this time chart.

  First, an example of the first treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), when the special figure game is being executed, the first treasure box effect is started when the first time 57 SHT 21 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached. When the first treasure box effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), the display before the first treasure box effect is performed.

  In the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect, as in the first embodiment, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and a button image 57SH31B as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B) (see FIG. 21-4 (B) ) Is not displayed. In addition, when the first treasure box effect is started, an appearance sound is output from the left speaker 8L as a front stage special effect sound. The appearance sound is continuously output while the first-stage display of the first treasure box effect is being performed. By the appearance sound being output from the left speaker 8L, the player is reminded of the operation of the push button 31B.

  When the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B from the first time 57SHT21 to the second time 57SHT22, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (C), the treasure chest 57SH10 is opened, and the treasure chest 57SH10 An image is popped out of the contents 57SH11 wrapped in smoke from inside. When the treasure box 57SH10 is opened, the left speaker 8L outputs a sound of "paka", creating an atmosphere in which the treasure box 57SH10 is opened. Up to this point is the display before the first treasure box effect. Further, also when the second time 57SHT 22 is reached without the push sensor 35B detecting the operation of the push button 31B, the treasure chest 57SH10 is finally opened, and the second-stage display of the first treasure chest effect is displayed. The second time 57 SHT 22 may be set without the push sensor 35 B detecting the operation of the push button 31 B, and when the operation valid period has elapsed, the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect may not be performed.

  When the second time 57 SHT 22 is reached, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased, and the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect is started. When the second-stage display of the first treasure box effect is started, the main effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as the second-stage special effect sound as in the first treasure box effect. The main effect sound is continuously output while the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is being performed.

  In the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect, the contents 57SH11 popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. Here, the characters “super heat!” Are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 as the contents 57SH11. At this time, the treasure box 57SH10 is erased but may be displayed. When the word "super hot!" Is displayed, the left speaker 8L outputs a "hot hot" sound, which enhances the expectation for the execution of the SP reach and the jackpot state. Further, while the first treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-7 (B) to (D) is being executed, the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57 SH 51 by decoration characters.

  By displaying the characters “super heat!” On the main liquid crystal 5 as the contents 57SH11, the execution of the SP reach effect is predicted. Thereafter, when the third time 57 SHT 23 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached, the first treasure box effect ends. When the first treasure box effect is finished, the reach symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the main liquid crystal 5, and the reach effect is executed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (E), SP reach is executed as the first treasure box effect announcement. At this time, the decoration character of "SP reach" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, and the sound of "a confrontation" is output from the speaker 8 (the left speaker 8L and the right speaker 8R).

  Subsequently, an example of the second treasure box effect in which the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), when the special figure game is being executed, the second treasure box effect is started when the first time 57 SHT 21 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached. In addition, when it becomes the 0th time 57SHT20 before the 2nd treasure box effect is started, the aura sound which becomes a sign of execution of the 2nd treasure box effect is output from the speaker 8 (right speaker 8R, left speaker 8L) . The aura is continuously output from the zeroth time 57SHT20 to the first time 57SHT21.

  When the second treasure box effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), display in front of the second treasure box effect is performed. In the former stage display of the second treasure box effect, the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. At this time, the button image 57SH31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and the operation of the push button 31B is urged. The button image 57SH31B is displayed until the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31 or the operation of the push button 31B. The operation effective period of the push button 31B is between the first time 57SHT21 and the second time 57SHT22 shown in FIG. 21-9. While the button image 57SH31B is displayed, a time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed below the button image 57SH31B. In addition, when the second treasure box effect is started, an appearance sound is output from the right speaker 8R as a front stage special effect sound. The appearance sound is continuously output while the display at the front stage of the second treasure box effect is performed.

  While the bar of the time gauge 57SH5TG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the player operates the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B, the treasure box 57SH10 Is opened, and an image in which the content wrapped in smoke jumps out of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed. When the treasure box 57SH10 is opened, the right speaker 8R outputs a sound of "paka", creating an atmosphere in which the treasure box 57SH10 is opened. The contents 57SH11 that the treasure box 57SH10 opens and pops out are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. Up to this point is the display before the second treasure box effect. The second time 57 SHT 22 is reached without the push button 31 B being operated, and when the operation effective period elapses, the bar of the time gauge 57 SH 5 TG disappears, the button image 57 SH 31 B and the treasure box 57 SH 10 also disappear and the latter stage display is executed. Although the second treasure box effect is ended, the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect may be performed when the operation effective period has elapsed.

  When the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B during the operation effective period, when the second time 57SH22 is reached, the smoke displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is erased, and the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is started Ru. When the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is started, the main effect sound is output from the left speaker 8L as the second-stage special effect sound as in the first treasure box effect. The main effect sound is continuously output while the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect is being performed.

  In the second-stage display of the second treasure box effect, the contents 57SH11 popped out of the treasure box 57SH10 are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (D). Here, as the contents 57SH11, the characters “follow” are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. At this time, the treasure box 57SH10 remains displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, but may be erased. When the character "continuation" is displayed, the left speaker 8L outputs a sound "continuing?", Which indicates the execution of the pseudo-sequence effect. While the second treasure box effect shown in FIGS. 21-5C to 21D is being executed, the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the opened treasure box 57SH10.

  By displaying the text "continuation" on the main liquid crystal 5 as the contents 57SH11, the execution of the on-hold change presentation is predicted. Thereafter, the third time 57 SHT 23 shown in FIG. 21-9 is reached, and when the second treasure box effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (E), the decorative symbol display areas 5 L and 5 R of the main liquid crystal 5 are displayed. As the decorative pattern, the number of one shift, here "7" in the decorative pattern display area 5L, the number "8" is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display area 5C is variable The display is continuing. Following this, a pseudo-series effect is performed. When the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R restart variable display again from the temporary stop state in the pseudo-series effect, a sound of "restart" is output from the speaker 8.

  Thus, in the second embodiment of the feature portion 57SH, in the first treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is not displayed in the main liquid crystal 5 within the operation effective period of the push button 31B, and in the second treasure box effect The button image 57SH31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 within the operation effective period of the push button 31B. For this reason, the game interest can be improved by changing the aspect of the treasure box effect (second treasure box effect) as the advance notice effect.

  Further, in the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, the aspect of the sound output performed in the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect is different. Specifically, in the first treasure box effect, the appearance sound is output in the former stage display, and the main effect sound is output in the latter stage display, while in the second treasure box, the precursor sound is output before the former stage display is performed. The appearance sound is output in the front stage display, and the main effect sound is output in the rear stage display. For this reason, at the stage where the front display is performed, the appearance sound is output in any of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, but in the second treasure box effect, the alarm sound is output, and the treasure box effect is started. You can draw attention to what is being done. Therefore, the game interest can be improved by changing the aspect of the treasure box effect as the advance notice effect.

(Modification of feature portion 57SH)
Hereinafter, the modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with characteristic part 57SH is demonstrated. In the modified example of the characteristic portion 57SH, a button image (push button) displayed when the treasure box is opened when the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect The display mode of the button image displayed within the operation valid period of 31 B may be different. For example, in the first treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A-1), a small button image 57SH31BS smaller than the button image 57SH31B of the normal size is displayed, and in the second treasure box effect, FIG. As shown in 10 (B), a large button image 57SH31BB larger than the button image 57SH31B may be displayed. In the first treasure box effect, a button image 57SH31B of a normal size may be displayed, and in the second treasure box effect, a large button image 57SH31BB may be displayed. In the first treasure box effect, a small button image may be displayed. 57SH31BS may be displayed, and in the second treasure box effect, a button image 57SH31B of a normal size may be displayed.

  Also, the character may be displayed together with the button image. For example, in the first treasure box effect, a normal button image 57SH31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A-2), and in the second treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (B-2) The character 57SHC may be displayed on the normal button image 57SH31B. Further, in the first treasure box effect, the character may be displayed on the button image 57SH31B, and in the second treasure box effect, a character different from the first treasure box effect may be displayed on the button image 57SH31B. .

  Further, when the button image is displayed, the operation mode of the push button may be made different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. For example, in the first treasure box effect, an image may be displayed that prompts the user to press and hold the push button 31B, and in the second treasure box effect, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to continuously hit the push button 31B. Then, in the first treasure box effect, the push button 31B is pressed for a predetermined time, for example, 4 seconds, to display an image opened by the treasure box 57SH10. In the second treasure box effect, the push button 31B is displayed a predetermined number of times, for example, 20. An image opened by the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed by being repeatedly hit.

  Also, the lighting / blinking state of the game effect lamp 9 may be made different with the display of the button image. For example, in the first treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A-1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks, but the button image is not displayed during the operation effective period of the push button 31B. In the treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B-1), the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on and the button image 57SH31B may be displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. In FIGS. 21-11 (A-1) and (B-1), the blinking state of the game effect lamp 9 shown in FIG. 1 is schematically shown.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-11 (A-2) and (B-2), when the electric decoration 57SH30 is provided on the surface of the gaming machine frame 3, the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect and The lighting state (the flow of light) of the electric decoration 57SH40 may be different between the two. The electric decoration 57SH40 includes an electric decoration upper portion 57SH40A and an electric decoration lower portion 40B, and the electric decoration upper portion 57SH40A is located above the upper end side of the upper plate 57SH41, and the electric decoration The lower part 57SH40B is located below the upper end side of the upper plate 57SH41. The lower part of the electric decoration lower part 57SH40B is shaped to gather in the center as it goes downward, and the lower end part of the lower part of the electric decoration lower part 57SH40B is connected to the lower end part of the stick controller 31A.

  When such an electric decoration 57SH40 is provided, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (A-2), for example, in the first treasure box effect, the electric decoration upper portion 57SH40A in the operation effective period of the push button 31B. Flashes on the whole, suggesting the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, in the second treasure box effect, during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B-2), the light blinked at the upper part 57SH40A of the electric decoration lowers to the electric decoration lower part 57SH40B, The push button 31B provided above the stick controller 31A at the lower end portion (central portion) of the electric decoration lower portion 57SH 40B may be illuminated. The light flowing down the lower part 57SH40B of the electric decoration lowers the illumination of the push button 31B to urge the player to operate the push button 31B. As described above, the lighting state (the flow of light) of the electric decorative body 57SH40 may be made different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  Further, the sounds outputted from the speaker 8 may be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A-1), in the first treasure box effect, the first appearance sound is output from the left speaker 8L in the front stage display, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (B-1). In the second treasure box effect, the second appearance sound may be output from the right speaker 8R in the front stage display. Further, the main effect sound output in the second stage display may be differentiated between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, and the appearance sound and the main effect sound output in both the first stage display and the second stage display You may make it differ by 1 treasure box effect and 2nd treasure box effect.

  In addition, when the aspect of the output sound (appearing sound, main effect sound, etc.) is different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, the length of the sound is an example different from the aspect of the output sound. The height of the sheath sound and the magnitude of the volume may be different. Alternatively, a mechanical sound may be output in one of the treasure box effects, and a sound such as a speech may be output in the other treasure box effect, or the number of speakers to be output may be different, for example, In one treasure box effect, sounds may be output from a plurality of speakers, and in the other treasure box effect, sounds may be output from a single speaker. Furthermore, when the push button 31B or the like is vibrated in both the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, the vibration sound may or may not be emitted.

  In the above embodiment, the sound relating to the first treasure box effect and the previous stage display of the second treasure box effect are output from the left speaker 8L, and the sound relating to the second stage display of the second treasure box effect is output from the right speaker 8R. It may be output in the aspect of For example, the sound related to the first treasure box effect may be output from the right speaker 8R, or all the sounds related to the second treasure box effect may be output from the left speaker 8L. Further, all the sounds relating to the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect may be output from one of the right speaker 8R and the left speaker 8L, or may be output from both the right speaker 8R and the left speaker 8L.

  Also, the vibration state of the push button 31B may be made different. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (A-2), in the first treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is displayed during the operation valid period until the operation of the push button 31B is performed, and the push button 31B is displayed. Is vibrated, and as shown in FIG. 21-12 (B-2), in the second treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is displayed and the push is performed until the operation of the push button 31B is performed in the operation valid period. Although the button 31B is vibrated, the push button 31B may not be vibrated. Also, the modes of vibration may be made different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect and the second. For example, in the first treasure box effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated continuously, and in the second treasure box effect, the push button 31B may be intermittently vibrated.

  Further, the operation target may be a device other than the push button, for example, the stick controller 31A. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (A-1), in the first treasure box effect, a controller image 57SH 31A imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed in the operation effective period, and the controller sensor unit 35A operates the stick controller 31A. When detected, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12-13 (B-1), in the second treasure box effect, the button image 57SH31B is displayed in the operation effective period, and the push button 31B is displayed. When the push sensor 35B detects an operation, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed. In this case, the displayed image and the operated device may or may not correspond. For example, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects the operation of the stick controller 31A while the button image 57SH31B is displayed, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed, or the controller image 57SH31A is displayed. When the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an auto button and an automatic double hit function. The "auto button" is a function to execute processing assuming that the player does not operate the push button 31B in practice but the button or the like is operated. That is, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, processing is executed assuming that the push button 31B is performed even if the push button 31B is not operated, and a treasure box effect is performed.

  In addition, "automatic consecutive hit" means that the player actually operates the push button 31B continuously (for example, for a long time), but the player also operates the push button 31B continuously several times (for example, the push) It is a function to detect that the button 31B is continuously hit). That is, when the automatic consecutive hit function is set to be effective, even if the push button 31B is not operated a plurality of times consecutively, the processing is executed assuming that the button etc. is continuously operated and the advance notice is displayed. indicate. The function of automatic continuous hitting may be started from the point of time when the long press of the push button 31B is started, or may be started after a predetermined time, for example 4 seconds, has elapsed from the point of starting the long press.

  Note that the functions of the auto button and the auto continuous hit may be realized by the operation of the stick controller 31A instead of the operation of the push button 31B. In the case of the stick controller 31A, the extension may be performed corresponding to the long press of the push button 31B, and the operation of drawing continuously may be performed corresponding to the continuous hitting of the push button 31B.

  The auto button and the auto repeat function may be always provided to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be set from a dedicated screen by the player when predetermined timing, for example, when variable display is not performed. It is also good. Moreover, the function of the auto button and the automatic double hit may be provided to both of the pachinko machine 1 or only one of them.

  For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set the function of the auto button, an auto button display indicating that the function of the auto button is set may be provided. As a display indicating that the function of the auto button is set, for example, when the function of the auto button is not set, the function of the auto button is set as shown in FIG. 21-13 (A-2). When the auto button function is set, the auto button function is set at the upper right corner of the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. 21-13 (A-3). An auto-indicating display 57SH5AS is displayed to indicate that the camera is on. The auto button display may be performed at any time, for example, when the function of the auto button is set, the display may be started to be always displayed, or the operation of the push button 31B may be a push sensor 35B. May be displayed when it is detectable. Further, the operation of the push button 31B may be displayed when the push sensor 35B can not detect the operation.

  A display indicating that the function of the auto button is set may be displayed, for example, the during-auto display 57SH5AS on the main liquid crystal 5 may be displayed at any position on the main liquid crystal 5. And may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. In addition, an auto button setting lamp may be provided to indicate that the function of the auto button is set, and the auto button setting lamp may be turned on when the function of the auto button is set.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set the function of automatic double hitting, it can be displayed that the function of automatic double hitting is set as in the case of the setting of the function of the automatic button when the automatic button can be set. You may do so. In addition, when both auto button auto repeat strikes can be set, the indication that the function of auto repeat strikes is set and the indication that the function of auto repeat strikes is set can be displayed separately. It is also good.

  For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the function of the auto button, for example, when the function of the auto button is set in the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, whether the function of the auto button works or not The aspect of this may be different. For example, in the first treasure box effect, when the button image 57SH31B is not displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in the operation valid period, and in the second treasure box effect, when the button image 57SH31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal in the operation valid period, the first treasure box effect Then, the function of the auto button may not work in the operation valid period, and the function of the auto button may work in the operation valid period in the second treasure box effect. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has, for example, a function of automatic double hitting, the aspect of whether or not the function of automatic double hitting works may be similarly different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  Further, as the push button, a projecting push button that can be in a projecting state and a non-projecting state may be used. For example, the projecting type push button is normally in a non-projecting state, and in a part or all of when the push sensor can detect the operation of the push button, the projecting push button protrudes from the non-projecting state. Further, the push sensor for detecting the operation of the projecting push button detects the operation of the player when the projecting push button is depressed to a certain extent, as in the case of the above push button 31B, in the non-projecting state. When the projecting type push button is in the projecting state, the operation of the player is detected when the projecting type push button is pushed in about half from the projecting state. When such a projecting push button is provided, when the projecting push button is in the projecting state, the main liquid crystal 5 displays a projecting button image simulating the projecting push button in the projecting state. You may

  When the projecting type push button is provided, for example, in the first treasure box effect, the projecting type push button is in the non-projecting state in the operation effective period, and a button image similar to the button image 57SH31B is displayed to operate the projecting type push button When the push sensor detects an image to open the treasure box 57SH10, in the second treasure box effect, the protrusion type push button is set in the protrusion state, the protrusion button image is displayed in the operation effective period, and the protrusion type push button is When the push sensor detects an operation, an image for opening the treasure box 57SH10 may be displayed.

  Further, when the projecting push button is operated, the projecting button image may be operated to display an image in which the projecting button image is pressed. For example, a movable combination that moves up and down in front of the main liquid crystal 5 may be provided, and the movable combination may be lowered to press the protrusion button image to display an image in which the protrusion button image is pressed. Alternatively, a character or the like may be displayed on the projecting button image, or a character or the like may kick the projecting button image from above to act on the projecting button image to display an image in which the projecting button image is pressed. These display modes may be appropriately selected and displayed so as to be different between the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  Further, instead of the sensor for detecting the player's operation such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, a sensor for detecting the player's operation may be provided. For example, it may be a sensor that detects a hand holding the player over the surface of the gaming machine frame 3 or a sensor that detects how to move a hand moved by the player. As these sensors, an image sensor, a distance sensor, an optical sensor or the like may be used.

  Further, in the above-mentioned treasure box effect, the post-stage display is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in any of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, but the post-stage display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. For example, in the first treasure box effect, the former display may be performed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the latter display may be displayed in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. In the second treasure box effect, the former display and the latter display may be displayed in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51. You may do it. The point is that the first treasure box effect is performed only with the main liquid crystal 5, and the second treasure box effect may be performed only with the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, or the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect are main liquid crystal 5 and sub liquid crystal 57 SH51. It may be done by both.

  In the above embodiment and modification, the button display and the like in the first treasure box effect performed during the operation effective period and the button display and the like in the second treasure box effect may be interchanged with each other. Alternatively, the button display, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, the lighting state of the electric decoration 57SH40, and the like may be appropriately combined and executed.

  Moreover, in the treasure box effect of the above embodiment, the contents jumping out from the treasure box are characters, but may be other than characters, for example, food, marks, characters, patterns, etc., or characters or characters other than these characters. It may be a combination of things or things other than letters. When the content is a mark, it may be a mark for recalling an effect etc. suggested (predicted), or when the content is a character, it may be a character corresponding to the effect suggested (noticed).

  In the above embodiment, the treasure box effect is performed once in one variable display, and two or more treasure box effects are not performed in one variable display, but the treasure box effect is performed twice in one variable display. It may be made to be performed above. For example, the treasure box image 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, and a pseudo continuous effect etc. are notified (proposed) by the contents 57SH11 popped out from the treasure box image 57SH10 displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, It is also possible to suggest (notice) preview advance notice effects and the like by the contents 57SH11 jumping out from the displayed treasure box image 57SH10. In this case, the contents 57SH11 may be displayed simultaneously or may be displayed at different timings. Further, the contents 57SH11 may be displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, both may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, and may be divided and displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 51.

  Further, in the embodiment of the characteristic portion 57SH, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but for example, a game is performed by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value. Fluctuation display results derived from the image display device when one game is ended by the fluctuation display result being derived to the image display device capable of variably displaying plural kinds of symbols that can be started as well as being distinguishable The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which winning is made possible.

(Description of feature portion 57SH and feature portion 31AK)
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the feature portion 31AK, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs title notification for notifying a title corresponding to the reach effect, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the feature portion 57SH and the feature portion 31AK. In addition, for example, it may be possible to give a notice (suggestion) of reach production.

  In addition, in each of the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect, the notice of the reach effect (suggested) is given, and in the first treasure box effect, the reach effect via the title notification is notified (suggested), and in the second treasure box effect Alternatively, it may be possible to give notice (suggesting) reach effect not via title notification. Also, the appearance sound or the main effect sound may be different depending on whether the title notification is performed or not performed.

(Description of feature portion 57SH and feature portion 109SG)
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the feature portion 109SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set, for example, three setting values of “1” to “3”, and the smaller the setting value is, the larger the jackpot probability ( Disbursement rate etc. becomes high. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the feature portion 57SH and the feature portion 109SG, for example, the setting value may be suggested or notified by the first treasure box effect and the second treasure box effect.

  For example, the second treasure box effect may be made easier to execute than the first treasure box effect as the setting value is smaller. In this case, when the first treasure box effect is executed, the possibility that the setting value is small (the payout rate is high) is high. Alternatively, the appearance rate of the first treasure box effect may be higher than when the setting value is even is more than odd. In addition, in a specific treasure box effect, for example, in the first (so-called morning 1) first treasure box effect on the day of the business day, an effect that suggests a set value may be performed.

  Moreover, in the first treasure box effect, a specific effect may be easily determined, such as the big hit notification effect may be more easily determined as the setting value is smaller. Further, the ratio of the determination factor of the payout rate may be different depending on the setting value, and the execution ratio of the second treasure chest effect may be different than that of the first treasure chest effect depending on the high or low of the determinant. As a factor to determine the payout rate, for example, a big hit probability, a small hit probability, a probability change rate, a probability change continuation rate and the like can be mentioned. The probability change rate is, for example, the proportion of the probability change big hit in the entire low probability state (usually the big hit and the probability change big hit), and the probability change continuation rate is, for example, the probability change big hit in the whole high hit state It means the ratio occupied.

  Also, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is three levels of “1” to “3”, but the number of stages may be two or four or more, for example, six stages of “1” to “6” It is also good. In addition, the smaller the set value, the higher the probability of winning (outgoing rate), but the larger the set value, the higher the probability of outgoing (outgoing rate).

(Additional note on feature 57SH)
(11) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention has a first display means (for example, the main liquid crystal 5 etc.) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, A sub-liquid crystal (57SH51 etc.), and the pachinko
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that performs control to cause the first display unit and the second display unit to perform display related to a game;
And detecting means for detecting an action of the player (for example, a push sensor 35B for detecting the action of the push button 31B).
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect for displaying contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after displaying the treasure box 57SH10) after displaying the former stage after displaying the latter stage.
As the specific effect,
In the first display means, after performing the first front display which is the front display, the rear display is performed after the first front display which is the front display is performed by the first display. (1) After the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C) (D), for example, as shown in FIG. 1st treasure chest effect etc. which are opened and display contents 57SH11 coming out from treasure chest 57SH10,
A second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the second liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the second stage display after performing the second stage display, which is the first stage display, on the second display means) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 that are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened; Is feasible and
In the first specific effect, the latter-stage display is displayed based on the detection of the detection means (for example, after the display of the treasure box 57SH10 in the main liquid crystal 5, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)) When the push button 31B is operated by the player and the push sensor 35B detects the operation (operation) of the player, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C) (D), the treasure box 57SH10 is opened and the treasure box is opened. Display contents 57SH11 coming out of 57SH10, etc.),
In the second specific effect, even when the detection means is not detected, the latter-stage display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51) After that, even when the push button 31B is not operated by the player and the push sensor 35B does not detect the operation (operation) of the player, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C) (D), the treasure box 57SH10 The second treasure box effect etc. for displaying contents 57SH11 released from the treasure box 57SH10 are characterized.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by changing the mode of the effect.

(12) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention has a first display means (for example, the main liquid crystal 5 etc.) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, the second display means) more difficult to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal (57SH51 etc.), and the pachinko
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that performs control to cause the first display unit and the second display unit to perform display related to a game;
And detecting means for detecting an action of the player (for example, a push sensor 35B for detecting the action of the push button 31B).
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect for displaying contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after displaying the treasure box 57SH10) after displaying the former stage after displaying the latter stage.
As the specific effect,
In the main liquid crystal 5, a first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)) is displayed after the first-stage display, which is the first-stage display, is performed by the first display means after the second-stage display. After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-4 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 which are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened;
A second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the second liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the second stage display after performing the second stage display, which is the first stage display, on the second display means) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the first treasure box effect etc. displaying the contents 57SH11 that are released from the treasure box 57SH10 when the treasure box 57SH10 is opened; Is feasible and
In the first specific effect, when the operation of the player is received, the instruction display for instructing the operation is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B) and FIG. 21-9, the operation of the first treasure box effect) During the effective period, the main liquid crystal 5 does not display the button image 57SH 31 B imitating the push button 31 B, etc.),
In the second specific effect, when the operation of the player is accepted, an instruction display for instructing the operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B) and FIG. 21-9, the operation of the second treasure box effect is effective) In the period, a button image 57SH31B imitating the push button 31B is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and the like.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by changing the mode of the effect.

(13) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention has a first display means (for example, the main liquid crystal 5 etc.) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, the second display means) more difficult to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal (57SH51 etc.), and the pachinko
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that performs control to cause the first display unit and the second display unit to perform display related to a game;
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
Sound control means (for example, voice control board 13 etc.) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means;
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect for displaying contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after displaying the treasure box 57SH10) after displaying the former stage after displaying the latter stage.
As the specific effect,
In the main liquid crystal 5, a first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)) is displayed after the first-stage display, which is the first-stage display, is performed by the first display means after the second-stage display. After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C) (D), the treasure box 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10, and the like),
A second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B)), which is displayed after the second stage display, which is the first stage display, is performed by the second display means, the second stage display is a sub image display device 57SH51 After displaying the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the treasure box 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10, etc.). Is possible,
The sound control means is
When the first specific effect is executed, a specific sound is not output in the first stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), the display of the treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on the image display device 5) Do not output the appearance from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc.) while
When the second specific effect is executed, a specific sound is output in the second stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the image display device 5 displays the treasure box 57SH10) The speaker 8 L, 8 R outputs an appearance sound, etc.) when

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by changing the mode of the effect.

(14) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention has a first display means (for example, the main liquid crystal 5 etc.) capable of displaying a game and a second display means (for example, the second display means) more difficult to recognize than the first display means. A sub-liquid crystal (57SH51 etc.), and the pachinko
A display control unit (for example, a display control unit 123 or the like) that performs control to cause the first display unit and the second display unit to perform display related to a game;
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
Sound control means (for example, voice control board 13 etc.) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means;
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a treasure box effect for displaying contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 after displaying the treasure box 57SH10) after displaying the former stage after displaying the latter stage.
As the specific effect,
In the main liquid crystal 5, a first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B)) is displayed after the first-stage display, which is the first-stage display, is performed by the first display means after the second-stage display. After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C) (D), the treasure box 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10, and the like),
A second specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the second liquid crystal 57SH51 displays the second stage display after performing the second stage display, which is the first stage display, on the second display means) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (C) and (D), the treasure box 57SH10 is opened to display the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10, etc.) Yes,
The sound control means is
The sound output mode is made different between when the first specific effect is performed and when the second specific effect is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), the main liquid crystal 5 has a treasure box) When 57SH10 is displayed, no leading sound is output as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), and as shown in FIG. 21-8 (B), when treasure box 57SH10 is displayed on sub liquid crystal 57SH51, As shown in FIG. 21-8 (A), a precursor sound is output, etc.).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by changing the mode of the effect.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (11) to (14), the display control means does not execute the first specific effect and the second specific effect simultaneously (for example, displayed on the main liquid crystal 5) The treasure box 57SH10 displayed on the treasure box 57SH10 and the sub liquid crystal 57SH51 may not be executed in one variable display, and the like.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (11) to (15), the display control means executes the specific effect by the first display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B) After the display of the treasure box 57SH10 in the sub liquid crystal 57SH51, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C) (D), in the main liquid crystal 5, the treasure box 57SH10 is opened and the contents 57SH11 coming out of the treasure box 57SH10 May be displayed).

  According to the above configuration, since the player can easily recognize the rendering result, it is possible to improve the interest.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (11) to (16), the specific effect is an advance notice effect that suggests an effect other than the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. Suggested treasure box effect, as shown in FIG. 21-5, treasure box effect that suggests a change in the pending display displayed in the pending display area 57SH 52, as shown in FIG. 21-8, as shown in FIG. 21-8, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative pattern displayed on the screen may be a treasure box effect or the like for anticipating a pseudo-series effect that appears to perform a plurality of changes in one change.

  According to the above configuration, since the variations suggested for effects other than the specific effect increase, it is possible to improve the interest.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (11) to (17), the display control means gives notification of an operation instruction for instructing an operation in the first specific effect (for example, the push button 31B is displayed small) Notification of the operation instruction for displaying the small button image 57SH31BS shown in FIG. 21-10 (A-1) and notification of the operation instruction for instructing the operation in the second specific effect (for example, the push button 31B is largely displayed, The notification of the operation instruction for displaying the large button image 57SH31BB shown in FIG. 21-10 (A-2) may be made different (for example, the small button image 57SH31BS and the large button image 57SH31BB may be different) .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 10 ... general winning opening 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A, 22B ... start opening Switch 23 ... count switch 30 ... hitting operation handle 31A ... stick controller 31 B ... push button 32 ... movable body 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (2)

A game machine comprising a first display means capable of displaying a game and a second display means less recognizable than the first display means, comprising:
Display control means for performing control to cause the first display means and the second display means to display a game-related information;
Sound output means capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
Sound control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means;
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect of displaying the latter display after performing the former display,
As the specific effect,
A first specific effect which is displayed after the first display, which is the first display, is performed on the first display means, in the second display;
It is possible to execute a second specific effect of displaying the second-stage display after performing the second-stage display, which is the first-stage display, on the second display unit,
The sound control means is
When the first specific effect is executed, the specific sound is not output in the first front-stage effect,
A gaming machine characterized by outputting a specific sound in the second stage effect when the second specified effect is executed. A game machine comprising a first display means capable of displaying a game and a second display means less recognizable than the first display means, comprising:
Display control means for performing control to cause the first display means and the second display means to display a game-related information;
Sound output means capable of outputting sounds relating to gaming;
Sound control means for controlling the sound output from the sound output means;
The display control means
It is possible to execute a specific effect of displaying the latter display after performing the former display,
As the specific effect,
A first specific effect which is displayed after the first display, which is the first display, is performed on the first display means, in the second display;
It is possible to execute a second specific effect of displaying the second-stage display after performing the second-stage display, which is the first-stage display, on the second display unit,
The sound control means is
A game machine characterized in that a mode of sound output differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed.

Images